Canon ImageRunner 600 Service Manual Download Page 35

Page: 35 / 875

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1-14

CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV.1 JAN. 2000 PRINTED IN U.S.A.

Figure 1-303 Cross Section

Cross Section

[1]

[33]

[34]

[35]

[36]

[37]

[38]

[39]

[40]

[41]

[42]

[43]

[14]
[15]

[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]

[21]
[22]

[23]

[24]
[25]

[26]

[27]

[28]
[29]

[30]

[31]
[32]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[7] [8] [9][10] [11]

[12]

[13]

Summary of Contents for ImageRunner 600

Page 2: ... INC JAPAN SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM ACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTED MATTER ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE COMPANY IMPORTANT Prepared by OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 3 OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SU...

Page 3: ...he various units involved are operated and shows how they may be disassembled assembled and adjusted CHAPTER 6 Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images are formed It also explains the timing at which the various units involved in image formation are operated and shows how they may be disassembled assembled and adjusted CHAPTER 7 Pick Up Feeding System discusses the principles ...

Page 4: ...All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of this Service Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify and isolate faults in the machine This Service Manual is prepared so that a full understanding may be attained when it is used side by side with the separately available Copier Basic Series Refer to the appropriate section of th...

Page 5: ...INTED IN U S A iii System Configuration The imageRUNNER 600 may be configured as follows 1 Saddle Finisher D2 2 Cover Insertion Unit A1 3 Paper Folding Unit B1 4 Printer Board 5 imageRUNNER 600 6 Side Paper Deck C1 7 Copy tray 8 Finisher D1 5 1 2 8 3 6 7 4 Figure 1 ...

Page 6: ...ost Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off before operating the main power switch After turning off the main power switch disconnect the communication cable from the printer board so that data will not be accepted during work 2 Do not turn off the main power switch when downloading is taking place Other wise the machine may stop operating 3 Some units remain powered even...

Page 7: ...1 29 CONTENTS CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATIONS I BASIC OPERATIONS 2 1 A Functional Construction 2 1 B Electrical Circuitry 2 2 1 Outline 2 2 2 MFC PCB 2 2 3 Image Processor PCB 2 2 4 DC Controller PCB 2 3 5 Control panel CPU PCB 2 3 6 Original Orientation Detection PCB 2 3 7 Image Server 2 3 C Basic Sequence of Operations 2 5 1 Basic Sequence of Operations power on 2 5 D Controlling the Main Motor M1 2 ...

Page 8: ...ng the Image Leading Edge Sensor 3 34 6 Removing the Standard White Plate 3 35 7 After Replacing the Standard White Plate 3 36 CHAPTER 4 IMAGE PROCESSING SYSTEM I OUTLINE 4 1 II ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING4 4 A Outline 4 4 III DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 4 6 A Outline 4 6 B Image Procesing Functional Block 4 7 C Shading Correction 4 9 D Line Conversion 4 10 E Editing 4 11 F Density Processing 4 12 1 Outl...

Page 9: ...e control 6 9 F Determining the Optimum Developing Bias 6 10 G Potential Control for Transparency Mode 6 11 H Target Potential Correction in Each Mode 6 12 1 Adjusting the Density during Printing PDL input 6 13 2 Potential Control during High Humidity Mode 6 14 3 Density Adjustment during Printing scanner input 6 15 III CONTROLLING THE CHARGING MECHANISMS 6 16 A Controlling the Primary Charging Me...

Page 10: ...ociated with the Process Unit 6 55 1 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp Unit 6 55 2 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit 6 56 3 Removing the Primary Charging Assembly 6 57 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 6 57 5 Removing the Dust Collecting Roller 6 58 6 Removing the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly 6 58 C Charging Wire 6 60 1 Outline 6 60 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Cha...

Page 11: ...Feeder Motor M12 7 26 1 Outline 7 26 E No Stacking Operation 7 27 1 Outline 7 27 2 Outline of Operations 7 28 F Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position 7 32 1 Outline 7 32 2 Operations 7 33 3 Controlling the Horizontal Registration Motor M15 7 34 V CONTROLLING THE DELIVERY ASSEMBLY 7 35 A Reversal Delivery 7 35 VI CONTROLLING THE CASSETTE HEATER 7 36 VII DETECTING JAMS 7 38 A Outline 7 38 1...

Page 12: ...ical Path Roller 2 7 68 D Registration Feeding Assembly 7 70 1 Removing the Registration Clutch Registration Brake Clutch 7 70 2 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch 7 70 3 Removing the Registration Roller 7 71 4 Removing the Pre Registration Roller 7 72 E Feeding Assembly 7 74 1 Removing the Feeding Belt 7 74 2 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing lever Sensor 7 76 F Duplexing Unit 7 77 1...

Page 13: ...ng the Main Sub Heater 8 33 3 Removing the Thermal Switch 8 34 4 Removing the Main Thermistor 8 35 5 Removing the Sub Thermistor 8 36 D Fixing Roller Assembly 8 37 1 Removing the Upper Fixing Roller 8 37 2 Mounting the Upper Fixing Roller 8 39 3 Removing the Lower Fixing Roller 8 40 4 Adjusting the Nip 8 40 E Separation Claw Assembly 8 42 1 Removing the Upper Separation Claw 8 42 2 Removing the Lo...

Page 14: ... Cooling Fan 9 37 6 Removing the De Curling Fan 9 38 7 Removing the Feeding Fan 9 39 8 Removing the Drum Fan 9 40 9 Removing the Inverter Cooling Fan 9 41 10 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly Fan 9 42 11 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 9 43 12 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 9 44 13 Removing the Separation Fan 9 45 14 Removing the Laser Scanner Fan 9 46 D Drive Assembly 9...

Page 15: ...S 10 18 A Outline 10 18 III DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY 10 20 A External Covers 10 21 1 Removing the Front Cover 10 21 2 Removing the Rear Cover 10 24 3 Removing the Right Cover 10 24 4 Removing the Upper Cover 10 25 B Deck Body 10 26 1 Detaching the Deck from the Copier 10 26 2 Removing the Compartment 10 28 3 Changing the Deck Paper Size 10 30 4 Adjusting the Deck Registration 10 31 5 Adjusting the Pos...

Page 16: ...LING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II 11 27 VI INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER A1 11 36 A Setting the Board 11 36 B Installing to the Copier 11 39 C Checking the Operation 11 42 VII INSTALLING THE CASSETTE HEATER FOR 120V MODEL CASSETTE HEATER UNIT 15 11 53 A Installing to the Copier 11 53 CHAPTER 12 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING I PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 12 1 II DURABLES TABLE 12 2 A Copier 12...

Page 17: ...n Roller 13 22 8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Manual Tray Pickup Feeding Roller 13 23 9 Mounting the Solenoids 13 24 9 1 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid SL1 13 25 9 2 Position of the Fixing Cleaning Belt Solenoid SL2 13 26 9 3 Position of the Delivery Flapper Solenoid SL3 13 27 9 4 Position of the Fixing Feeding Unit Locking Solenoid SL4 13 27 9 5 Position of the Multifeeder Pickup La...

Page 18: ...opy has black lines feeding direction fuzzy thick 13 71 9 The copy has black lines feeding direction fine 13 72 10 The copy has white spots vertical 13 73 11 The copy has white lines vertical 13 73 12 The copy has white spots horizontal 13 74 13 The back of the copy is soiled 13 75 14 The copy has poor fixing 13 76 15 The copy has a displaced leading edge appreciably excess margin 13 77 16 The cop...

Page 19: ...mp fails to turn on 13 111 73 The scanning lamp fails to turn on 13 111 74 The cartridge inside toner feeder motor M6 fails to operate 13 112 75 The hopper inside toner feeder motor M18 fails to operate 13 112 76 The drum heater fails to operate 13 112 77 The Add Toner indicator fails to turn on 13 113 78 The Add Toner fails to turn on 13 113 79 The Control Card Set message fails to turn on 13 113...

Page 20: ...ng Service Mode and Selecting an Item 13 161 2 Ending Service Mode 13 162 3 Backing Up the RAM 13 162 4 Basic Operation 13 163 B DISPALY Control Display Mode 13 165 C I O Input Output Display Mode 13 176 1 DC CON 13 177 2 IP 13 179 3 FEEDER 13 189 4 SORTER 13 193 5 FM CON 13 203 8 D ADJUST Adjustment Mode 13 204 E FUNCTION Operation Inspection Mode 13 218 F OPTION Settings Mode 13 230 G PG Test Pr...

Page 21: ...II SPECIFICATIONS 1 2 A Copier 1 2 B Side Paper Deck C1 1 10 III NAMES OF PARTS 1 11 A External View 1 11 B Cross Section 1 14 IV OPERATING THE COPIER 1 16 A Turning on the Power Switch 1 16 B Control Panel 1 17 C Extension Mode 1 18 D User Mode 1 19 V ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER 1 21 VI SAFETY 1 22 A Safety of Laser Light 1 22 B CDRH Regulations 1 23 C Handling the Laser Assembly 1 24 D Safet...

Page 22: ...al the original may be read no more than once to turn out as many copies as needed 3 No Stacking Duplexing Mechanism The copier need not stack sheets in its duplexing unit capable of processing double sided copies without disrupting smooth flow 4 Large Capacity Paper Source The addition of accessories enables the copier to hold as many as 7 650 sheets of copy paper Paper deck right 1 500 sheets Pa...

Page 23: ... 202 Body Copyboard Light source Lens Photosensitive medium Console Fixed Fluorescent lamp Lens array F3 7 Amorphous silicon 108 mm dia Indirect photostatic Corona Twin laser Auto or manual Dry toner projection Front deck 2 holders front cassette 2 holders Manual feed tray about 5 5 mm deep about 50 sheets of 80 g m2 paper Corona Corona static separation Blade Heating rollers GP605 100 V model 760...

Page 24: ... A3 1 1 1 0 250 1 0 500 1 0 611 1 0 707 1 0 816 1 0 865 1 1 154 1 1 224 1 1 414 1 2 000 1 4 000 1 0 250 to 4 00 in 1 increments 5 min or less at 20 C room temperature 6 5 sec stream reading right deck Direct A4 LTR non AE face down delivery 5 2 sec book mode cassette 1 Direct A4 LTR non AE straight delivery not including pre heating of fluorescent lamp 999 copies max Single sided Double sided AB I...

Page 25: ...cing Paper SM 1 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Colored Paper recommended by Canon B4 A4 A4R Thick Paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 AR B5R LTR LTRR Plain Paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Tracing Paper SM 1 GNT 80 GSN 75 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Colored Paper recommended by Canon B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Japanese government postcards...

Page 26: ...ng Paper SM 1 GNT 80 GSN 75 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R Colored Paper recommended by Canon B4 A4 A4R Postcard vertical feeding only Japanese government postcards Label Sheet recommended by Canon B4 A4 A4R LTR LTRR Thick Paper 90 to 200 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A4R B5R LTR LTRR Plain Paper 64 to 80 g m2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5R A4R B5R 279 4 431 8 mm 11 17 LGL LTR LTRR STMT vertical feeding Colored Paper recommended by Can...

Page 27: ...ndard may be changed in user mode to 10 15 20 30 40 50 90 min or 2 3 or 4 hr Yes 60 min standard may be changed in user mode to 10 15 20 30 40 50 90 min or 2 3 or 4 hr Yes Finisher D1 Saddle Finisher D2 Cover Insertion Unit A1 Paper Folding Unit B1 Side Paper Deck C1 Cassette Heater Kit 16 for Side Paper Deck C1 Remote Diagnostic Device II Copy Data Controller A1 Control Card V Copy Tray Unit D1 O...

Page 28: ...t sunshine and keep at 40 C 85 or less Sound power level impulse mode Ozone 8 hr average Dimensions Width Depth Height Weight Copy paper Toner Consumables 78 dB or less 55 dB or less 764 mm 795 mm 1137 mm 251Kg 0 05 ppm or less Copying Stanby 100V 20A 2 0 498 357 12 158 346 311 269 100V 15A 1 5 497 355 12 155 315 269 224 120V 2 0 474 335 12 141 313 270 216 230V 2 0 467 330 16 135 298 255 200 Maxim...

Page 29: ...257 182mm A3 A5R B4 A5R A3 A4R B4 A4R A4 B5 A3 B4 A5R A3 A4R A3 B5R B4 A4R B4 B4 A3 B5 A4 III 61 1 IV 70 7 V 81 6 VI 86 5 II 200 0 III 141 4 IV 122 4 V 115 4 Copy paper size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4R B5R B5R B5R A4R A4R B5 B4 A3 A3 B4 B4 A3 A4 copies min 26 30 55 60 32 35 58 60 33 43 33 50 34 38 32 36 57 28 23 23 27 28 50 Reduce Enlarge Reproduction mode Direct Note A5R originals cannot be set in the ADF 1 ...

Page 30: ...431 8mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 LGL LGL LTRR STMTR 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 LTRR 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 LGL 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 Copy Size 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 LTR LGL LTRR STMT LTRR LGL LTRR 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 copies min 23 30 55 60 36 36 33 46 60 30 28 38 25 27 Reduce Enlarge III 64 7 IV 73 3 V 78 6 II 200 0 III 129 4 IV 121 4 Reproduction mode Direct Note A...

Page 31: ...nsions Weight Power supply Operating Conditions Temperature Humidity Atmospheric pressure Descriptions No claw retard type Side tray Plain Paper 64 to 80 g m2 A4 B5 LTR Tracing Paper SM 1 A4 B5 Colored Paper recommended by Canon A4 Thick Paper 90 to 200 g m2 A4 B5 LTR 385 mm high stack approx about 3 500 sheets of 80 g m2 A4 type ZQYxxxxx LTR type ZQZxxxxx By relocating the size guide plate in ste...

Page 32: ... 2 Control panel power switch 3 Original delivery tray 4 Main power switch 5 Manual feed tray 6 Upper right cover 7 Lower right cover 8 Waste toner case drum protective sheet holder 9 Right deck 10 Left deck 11 Cassette 3 12 Cassette 4 13 Front cover 14 Delivery tray 15 Heater switch cassette 16 Leakage breaker 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Detailed view of 15 and 16 15 16 ...

Page 33: ...4 Feeding assembly releasing lever 5 Service book holder 6 Grip drum stop tool holder 7 Cover switch door switch assembly Figure 1 302 External View 2 8 Total copy counter 9 Printer counter 10 Connector for downloading bi Centronics 11 Switch for downloading right LOAD for downloading left COPY for normal copying 12 LCD contrast adjuster 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 8 12 11 10 ...

Page 35: ...PYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A Figure 1 303 Cross Section B Cross Section 1 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 2 5 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Page 36: ...ller 18 Manual feed tray pickup roller 19 Manual tray separation roller 20 Registration roller 21 Transfer charging assembly 22 Separation charging assembly 23 Right deck pickup roller 24 Right deck feeding roller 25 Right deck separation roller 26 Right deck 27 Cassette 3 pickup roller 28 Cassette 3 feeding roller 29 Cassette 3 separation roller 30 Cassette 4 pickup roller 31 Cassette 4 feeding r...

Page 37: ... switch and control panel power switch When turning on the copier be sure to turn on the main power switch and then the control panel power switch in the order indicated 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C ID ON OFF COPY A MAIL BOX OPTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Copying Error COPY B Copying Error Data Data Error Error C ID 1 2 1 Control panel power switch 2 Main power lamp 3 Main power switch Figure 1 401 Arrang...

Page 38: ...ntrol panel power switch 8 Main power lamp 9 Stop key 10 Start key 11 Clear key 12 Numeric keypad 13 ID key 14 Interrupt key 15 User Mode key 16 Guide key 17 Reset key 18 Touch panel B Control Panel Turns on when the main power switch is turned on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 C ID ON OFF COPY A MAIL BOX OPTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Copying Error COPY B Copying Er...

Page 39: ...f frames or holes in the originals Use it to copy 2 4 or 8 originals on a single sheet of paper through automatic reduction Use it to copy a single image on a sheet of paper of a specific size through automatic enlargement by dividing into two or four Use it to make copies by reversing the black and white images of an original Use it to make sharp copies of an original Use it to make copies by com...

Page 40: ... control 4 digits Use it to enable disable ID control by group for ID No or count control enable disable Use it to return the common settings to factory settings Yes No Use it to select preference keys for the Basic screen from the mode keys on the Extension Mode screen or the memory keys for the mode memory Use it to enable disable automatic rotation of images on selected paper based on the resul...

Page 41: ...touch panel after operation 0 min 1 to 9 min Use it to set the length of time taken to start low power consumption mode after operation 10 5 20 30 40 50 60 90 min 2 to 40 hr Use it to set the length of time taken to start silent mode after opera tion 0 min 1 to 9 min Use it to set the day of the week on which the control panel power switch is turned off Sun to Sat 00 00 to 23 59 in 1 min incre men...

Page 42: ...DESCRIPTION Table 1 501 Parts V ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER Instruct the user to clean the following at least once a week No 1 2 Parts Copyboard glass ADF feeding belt Description Wipe it with a moist cloth then dry wipe it Wipe it with a cloth moistened with mild detergent solution then dry wipe it ...

Page 43: ...e copier s laser assembly is completely housed within a protective case and by means of external covers preventing leakage of laser light to the outside as long as the copier is used normally CLASS 1LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 APPAREILA RAYONNEMENT LASER DE CLASSE 1 APPARECCHIO LASER DI CLASSE 1 PRODUCTO LASER DE CLASE 1 APARELHO A LASER DE CLASSE 1 EN60825 1991 Figure 1 601 Laser Class Label ...

Page 44: ... set of regulations governing laser products The regulations apply to laser products produced on and after August 1 1976 and the sale of laser products within the US is prohibited unless they show compliance with the regulations Figure 1 602 shows the label certifying compliance with the CDRH regulations and all laser products to be sold in the US must bear a copy of the label CANON MANUFACTURED 3...

Page 45: ...r servicing areas around the copier s laser assembly as by avoiding the insertion of any tool having a high reflectance Be sure also to remove any watches and rings They can reflect the laser beam to damage your eyes during work The copier s laser beam is a red light Any covers that may reflect the laser beam bear a copy of the label shown in Figure 1 603 Exercise particular caution whenever servi...

Page 46: ...LUNG BERBR CKT NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER EN EL INTERIOR CIERRE SELLADO EVITE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ EN CASO DE ROTURA DE ESTE PARA SU APERTURA ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER PERICOLOSA IN CASO DI APERTURA E QUANDO IL BLOCCO DI SICUREZZA é GUASTO EVITARRE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO VARO AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEEN VARNI...

Page 47: ...E AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEEN VARNING LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STR LEN ADVARSEL LASER STR LING N R DENNE E...

Page 48: ... RAYONNEMENT LASER EN CAS D OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU VORSICHT LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN PRECAUCION RADIACION LASER CUANDO SE ABRE EVITAR EXPONERSE AL RAYO ATTENZIONE RADIAZIONE LASER IN CASO DI APERTURA EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL FASCIO VARO AVATTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA LASERS TEILYLLE L KATSO S TEESEEN VARNING LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPN...

Page 49: ...nts of dyes If your skin or clothes have come into contact with toner be sure to remove as much of it as possible with tissue paper and then wash with water Hot water will cause toner to turn jelly and become fused with cloth fibers resisting removal Further toner tends to react to vinyl material Keep it away from vinyl materials Caution Do not dispose of toner into fire It can lead to explosion ...

Page 50: ...ransfer charging assembly Pre transfer charging Separation claw Cleaner assembly Fixing assembly Scanning lamp Primary charging assembly Potential sensor Pickup deck cassette Pickup manual feed tray Pre exposure LED array Dust collecting roller VII IMAGE FORMATION A Outline Figure 1 701 shows the construction of the copier which uses an indirect photostatic method of image reproduction ...

Page 51: ...harging positive DC Step 3 Laser exposure Step 4 Development AC positive DC Step 5 Transfer negative DC Step 6 Separation AC positive DC Step 7 Fixing Step 8 Drum cleaning Figure 1 702 Static Image Formation Block Copy paper Drum rotation 2 Primary charging 1 Pre exposure 8 Drum cleaning 3 Laser exposure 4 Development 5 Transfer Manual feed tray Registration Deck Cassette 6 Separation 7 Fixing Del...

Page 52: ...c operations functions of each operation relationships between electrical and mechanical systems and timing at which each associated part is turned on I BASIC OPERATIONS 2 1 A Functional Construction 2 1 B Electrical Circuitry 2 2 C Basic Sequence of Operations 2 5 D Controlling the Main Motor M1 2 6 E Inputs to and Outputs from the Major PCBs 2 7 ...

Page 53: ...DC power supply PCB Relay PCB Page memory MFC PCB CCD PCB Motherboard Laser diver PCB Laser scanner Original Original illumination Optical path Image processor PCB Charging Development Transfer Pickup control Manual feed tray Cleaning Lower feeding assembly Cassette 3 Delivery tray Feeding Separation Fixing Photo sensitive drum Cassette 4 Image server hard disk Original Exposure System Laser Expos...

Page 54: ...ry and communications control device accessory Controls the page memory management mechanism and hard disk image input output Controls service mode Stores service mode data For details see E Backup Battery in Chapter 9 Externals and Auxiliary Control Stores user mode data For details see E Backup Battery in Chapter 9 Externals and Auxiliary Control Stores pickup delivery counter readings Controls ...

Page 55: ...ption Controls the scanner motor drive mechanism reversal motor drive mechanism and duplexing feeding motor drive mechanism Controls the cassette size detection mechanism and charging wire cleaning motor drive mechanism Controls lifter drive Name CPU Description Monitors key inputs Controls buzzer sound Tuns on off the LCD Name CPU Description Controls the original orientation detection mechanism ...

Page 56: ...d Fluorescent lamp inverter PCB Light intensity control PCB Light intensity sensor Non stacking feeding driver PCB Control panel M5 FL M4 CPU DP RAM Video controller A D Image processing circuit DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Etc Cassette inside Paper level detection PCB DC loads Clutch Solenoid Motor Sensor Etc IPC communication 2 Accessories ADF Finisher Etc Printer boards accessory I F P...

Page 57: ...assembly Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Drum motor MO Main motor M1 Fixing drive motor M3 Scanner motor M4 Control panel power switch ON From power on to standby yyyyyyyy yyyyyyyy yyyyyyyy yyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyy STBY WMUP WMUPR 195 C 200 C Scanner unit Printer unit VD VL Initial activation Controlled to 200 C C Basic Sequence of Operations 1 Basic Sequence of Operations power...

Page 58: ...2 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 38V 5V 0V 0V GND MAIN_MOTOR_ON MAIN_MOTOR_FG Main motor M1 When the main motor drive signal goes 1 the main motor starts to rotate When the main motor starts to rotate the pulse signal goes 1 When the pulse signal goes 0 error code E010 is indicated Item Power supply Drive signal Operating drive assembly Control Error detection Description 38 V from the relay PCB Signals MAIN_MOTO...

Page 59: ...g feeding driver PCB Scanner motor driver PCB Fluorescent lamp inverter PCB Light intensity control PCB HV DC PCB HV AC PCB Image processor PCB J3 J802 J3602 J1110 J1102 J502 J520 J521 J506 Laser scanner motor driver PCB J762 J723 J302 J295 J296 J711 J741 J852 J165 J1002 J853 J503 J506 J506 J510 J516 J516 J516 Heater driver PCB J2605 J505 J519 J1407 J525 J503 J1405 J1406 J1409 J1461 J1453 J1401 J1...

Page 60: ... at its home position 1 The light blocking plate is at PS1 When the scanner is at the image leading edge position 1 The light blocking plate is at PS3 When the fixing cleaning belt is running short 1 When the fixing cleaning belt is running out 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When the copyboard cover is closed 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is de...

Page 61: ...09 B10 B9 B8 J322 J197 J3601 1 J3602 B3 J3601 2 5V B10 J519 PS22 J511 A10 A9 A8 PS31 A3 A2 A1 PS32 A6 A5 A4 PS25 A9 A8 A7 J314 J518 J518 J518 Deck right paper sensor Deck right open closed sensor Deck right limit sensor Deck left pickup sensor Deck left feed sensor Deck right feed sensor Fixing feeding unit releasing lever sensor Deck left lifter sensor Deck left paper sensor J314 When paper is de...

Page 62: ...s detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When paper is detected 1 When the lifter is at the stop position 1 When the cassette 3 is closed 1 When paper is detected 1 PS45 J517 B6 B5 B4 PS46 J517 B9 B8 B7 PS44 J517 A10 A9 A8 PS47 J144 J502 B6 B5 B4 Cassette 4 paper sensor Cassette 4 open closed sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor Vertical path 1 paper s...

Page 63: ...artridge cover open closed sensor Cartridge detecting switch Waste toner clog detecting switch Pre transfer charging cleaning HP detecting switch Manual tray cover open closed detecting switch Front cover open closed detecting switch N O MSW8 Cartridge motor drive switch Primary charging wire cleaner HP detecting switch J509 A7 A6 N O MSW6 MSW6S J198 J1723 7 J197 J111 Transfer separ ation charging...

Page 64: ...35 J137 SIZE ON 5V SIZE4 J513 B4 B5 B6 B7 J257 J514 A11 A12 A13 A14 J266 SV1 0 SV1 1 0V 5V SV2 0 SV2 1 0V 5V J510 5V SVR1 B6 B5 B4 SVR1 J224 Original size sensor 1 Original size sensor 2 Original size sensor 3 Original size sensor 4 Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width volume DC controller PCB When an original is detected 0 When an original is ...

Page 65: ...or Fluorescent lamp heater Temperature sensor Fixing sub thermistor Potential sensor hopper internal toner lower limit sensor Potential control PCB J502 J2 1 J2 2 J2 4 J1 1 J1 2 J1 5 J3 4 J3 3 J3 2 J3 1 A11 A12 A13 A14 24V POT ON POT SIG DC controller PCB When toner is absent 0 When toner is absent 0 See III Fixing Assembly Temperature Control in Chapter 8 When toner is absent 0 See III Controllin...

Page 66: ...lutch Registration brake clutch Developing clutch Pre registration clutch Pre registration brake clutch Manual feed tray pickup clutch Vertical path 1 clutch Vertical path 2 clutch Deck right pickup clutch DC controller PCB When 0 CL1 turns on When 0 CL2 turns on When 0 CL3 turns on When 0 CL4 turns on When 0 CL5 turns on When 0 CL6 turns on When 0 CL7 turns on When 0 CL8 turns on When 0 CL9 turns...

Page 67: ...B3 24V SL4P SL4R SL4 J510 B10 B11 B12 24V SL6P SL6R SL6 J224 J193 J205 J197 J204 Fixing inlet guide solenoid Fixing cleaning belt solenoid Delivery flapper solenoid Fixing feeding unit locking solenoid Multifeeder pickup clutch solenoid When SL1P is 0 the plunger is pulled When SL1R is 0 the plunger is pushed When 0 SL2 turns on When 0 SL3 turns on When SL4P is 0 the plunger is pulled When SL4R is...

Page 68: ...r motor driver PC M5 M2 DC controller PCB Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Laser scanner motor Copyboard glass sensor Scanner motor Laser scanner motor driver PCB While rotating at constant speed 0 While M0 is rotating 1 While rotating 1 While M1 is rotating 1 While rotating 1 While M2 is rotating 1 While rotating at constant speed 0 While M3 is rotating 1 See ll Scanner Dive System...

Page 69: ...J290 FM1 A13 A15 A14 FM1LCK FM1 ON J131 J504 FM2 A4 A6 A5 FM2LCK FM2 ON J114 J503 FM3 A10 A12 A11 FM3LCK FM3 ON J131 J504 FM4 A4 A6 A5 FM4LCK FM4 ON J103 J502 Deck left lifter motor Cassette 3 liter motor Cassette 4 lifter motor Hopper internal toner feeder motor Primary charging assembly fan Fixing assembly heat discharge fan Scanner cooling fan Stream reading fan While M14 is rotating 1 While M1...

Page 70: ... cooling fan 1 Power supply cooling fan 2 Separation fan Laser scanner fan Pre exposure lamp While rotating at constant speed 0 While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While rotating at constant speed 0 While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half speed While rotating at constant speed 0 While the fan is rotating 1 24 V for full speed 12 V for half spee...

Page 71: ... 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Primary charging Transfer charging Dust collecting roller Developing assembly Fixing roller Feeding guide Pre transfer charging Separation charging Separation claw primary charging wire grid wire J273 J510 J731 1 T601 T701 J732 1 J732 5 J733 1 J733 3 J737 1 J734 1 J734 5 J722 1 J722 2 J722 3 HVT AC HVT DC1 SSR1 AC trans former When 0 the count is incremented When 0 the count ...

Page 72: ...copier s back J172 7 J172 6 J172 5 J172 4 J172 3 J172 2 J172 1 J23 1 J23 2 J167 J505 To finisher accessory A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 Finisher connector of the copier s back J151 5 J151 4 J151 3 J151 2 J151 1 J48 2 J48 1 J512 To paper deck accessory A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 Paper deck connector on the copier s back J152B 7 J152B 6 J152B 5 J152B 4 J152B 3 J152B 2 J152B 1 J152C 4 J152C 3 J152C 2 J239 38V J34 1 2 J1...

Page 73: ...e 3 1 B Basic Sequence of Operations 3 3 C Changing the Reproduction Ratio 3 4 II SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM 3 5 A Outline 3 5 B Controlling the Scanner Motor 3 6 III CONTROLLING THE SCANNING LAMP 3 8 A Outline 3 8 B Controlling the Temperature by a Fluorescent Lamp Heater 3 10 C Controlling Pre Heat Voltage 3 10 D Initial Activation 3 11 E Detecting an Error 3 12 IV DETECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE 3 14 A O...

Page 74: ...ading ADF mode double sided reading scanning by the No 1 mirror mount Illumination by a fluorescent lamp By a scanner home position sensor PS1 By an image leading edge sensor PS3 Main scanning direction images are processed by a line memory Sub scanning direction No 1 mirror mount is moved at different speeds No 1 mirror mount pulse control by a stepping motor M5 Lens mount fixed in position 1 Pre...

Page 75: ...ing plate No 1 mirror mount Fluorescent lamp heater H5 Scanning lamp FL1 Light intensity sensor PD2001 Copyboard glass sensor Component Description Fluorescent amp rated at 43 W Scanning lamp Scanner motor Scanner home position sensor Image leading edge sensor Copyboard glass sensor Light intensity sensor Fluorescent lamp temperature sensor 5 phase stepping motor Photointerrupter detects the scann...

Page 76: ... placed in the ADF Fluorescent lamp heater H5 Scanning lamp pre heat voltage Scanning lamp FL1 Scanner HP sensor PS1 Controlled to 70 C Image leading edge signal ITOP 1st page image leading edge Control panel power switch ON If not at HP HP search Reading the standard white plate Synchronizing in sub scanning direction If for scanning two or more pages kept on also in reverse to stabilize light in...

Page 77: ... Direction Part 2 Chapter 2 1 2 Images are processed by a line memory 2 Changing the Reproduction Ratio in Sub Scanning Direction Part 2 Chapter 2 1 2 The scanning speed of the No 1 mirror mount is varied Figure 3 105 Relationship between Scanning Speed and Reproduction Ratio 400 200 100 50 25 reverse 4000 2000 1000 500 8000 Scanning speed pps The scanner motor speed is varied in increments of 1 r...

Page 78: ...Scanner motor driver PCB Scanner motor M5 Scanner HP sensor PS1 Copyboard glass sensor PS57 forward reverse No 2 mirror mount No 1 mirror mount Drive signal Detection signal Detection signal 1 Direction of motor rotation 2 Speed of motor rotation Used to detect the presence absent of the copyboard glass If absent the drive signal to the motor is off Used to detect the home position of the No 1 mir...

Page 79: ...OPT DWN OPT CCW Not used Not used 38 VU GND GND GND 12 V 5 V 12 V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Excitation control The number of steps clock signals is determined based on combinations of D0 through D3 For motor drive The current to the motor is determined based on combinations of CD0 through CD2 In the absent of the copyboard glass 1 Motor drive sync clock pulses whe...

Page 80: ... Vertical size plate Standard white plate Higher setting Lower setting Copyboard glass Image leading edge sensor Vertical size plate Standard white plate Higher setting Lower setting Copyboard glass HP sensor Related Service Mode Use it to adjust the image leading edge position by entering a setting Setting range 0 to 2970 a change of 12 causes a shift of 1 mm COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X scanner im...

Page 81: ...perature sensor FL PWM FL ERR FL CLK FL TH FL GAIN FL REF HEAT ON GND FL TH FL DTCT FLON PRH PWM PRH ON Current detection T1001 Activation voltage Pre heat voltage 10 11 12 13 6 7 8 9 Output control Light intensity control PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 1 3 4 2 Relay PCB H5 To temperature sensor scanner heater Fluorescent lamp transformer Pre heat output control Transformer drive control When 0 the sca...

Page 82: ...L EXPOSURE SYSTEM Related Service Mode Use it to enter the setting recorded on the service label if the result of CCD ADJ is NG thereby determining FL PWM Settings 0 to 255 COPIER ADJUST LAMP L DATA scanning lamp light intensity data input Higher setting Lower setting Higher intensity Lower intensity ...

Page 83: ... to 70 C 1 5 sec 1 5 sec 70 C 2 9V 2 9 V 4 1V 2 9V 4 1V Intensity check Optimum value WMUP WMUPR SLEEP SCFW SCRV Optimum value Scanning lamp FL1 Scanning lamp pre heat voltage Fluorescent heater H5 Continued application of pre heat voltage would hinder temperature control therefore it is turned off and on in conjunction with the scanner heater The intensity of light is checked by the intensity sen...

Page 84: ...tch ON Scanning lamp FL1 STBY Controlled to 70 C 70 C 2 9 V 4 1 V Intensity check Optimum level 2 9 V Temperature at power on control panel Activation period 40 C or less 65 C or more 40 C to 60 C 60 C to 65 C 30 sec 20 sec 5 sec Off WMUP WMUPR SLEEP The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached a level appropriate to activation when the temperature around it reaches 70 C and the pre heat voltag...

Page 85: ...lled to 70 C Controlled to 70 C SLEEP SCFW SCRV E225 E219 E225 E219 An error is indicated if the optimum light intensity is not attained in 5 sec after activation The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached the end of its life upon detection of 170 C or higher during activation requiring much power to attain an optimum level of intensity The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached the end ...

Page 86: ...heater has turned on HEAT ON 1 2 While power is supplied the temperature does not reach 75 C or more 3 min after the fluorescent lamp heater has turned on E222 fluorescent lamp heater error 1 When the main power switch is turned on the temperature does not reach 10 C or higher 2 min after the fluorescent heater has turned on HEAT ON 1 2 While power is supplied a temperautre of 0 C or lower is dete...

Page 87: ... A IV DETECTING THE ORIGINAL SIZE A Outline Part 2 Chapter 2 5 1 5 1 1 Figure 3 401 Arrangement of the Original Sensors B Detection by Original Sensors Part 2 Chapter 2 5 1 5 1 2 C Detection by the Feeder Part 2 Chapter 2 5 1 5 1 4 AB Detection by Original Sensors AB INCH AB AB INCH Detection by Original Sensors INCH ...

Page 88: ... the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical ...

Page 89: ...igure 3 A501 Figure 3 A502 1 3 1 4 2 1 2 2 6 5 5 A No 1 Mirror Mount 1 Removing the Scanning Lamp Scanning Lamp Heater 1 Remove the right glass retainer 2 1 and the left glass retainer 2 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 and the scanning map cover 4 2 Remove the four screws 5 and detach the scanning lamp inside cover 6 ...

Page 90: ... reflection plate Cut off rear 3 Move the No 1 mirror mount 7 to where the scanning lamp inside cover has been removed then remove the two screws 8 and detach the anti reflection plate 9 Caution When mounting the anti reflection plate be sure to fit it in the cut offs front rear of the No 1 mirror mount securely Fur ther be sure to fit the connector in step 4 in the anti refection plate ...

Page 91: ...06 Figure 3 A507 Figure 3 A508 13 11 10 11 12 13 13 14 4 Disconnect the connector 10 and re move the two screws 11 then detach the scanning lamp 13 from the electrode plate front 12 5 Pull out the scanning lamp w the scan ning lamp heater 13 by pulling it to the front 6 Remove the scanning lamp heater 14 from the scanning lamp 13 ...

Page 92: ...f the scanning lamp if soiled When mounting the scanning lamp heater to the scanning lamp be sure to match the markings The connector of the scanning lamp heater must be toward the front of the copier When mounting the scanning lamp to the copier take care not to touch its light emit ting side When mounting the scanning lamp to the copier be sure that the print marking is to ward the upper front o...

Page 93: ...otor 1 Open the toner cartridge cover 2 Remove the upper right cover 3 Remove the rear cover 4 Remove the three screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 5 While pulling the scanner motor unit 3 toward the front detach the belt to detach the motor Adjustment When the position of the scanner motor must be adjusted while mounting it ad just the tension of the belt to 13 2N 1 3 0 2 kgf using a spring ...

Page 94: ... Before starting the work obtain the mirror positioning tool FY9 3040 000 1 Remove the ADF 2 Remove the right glass retainer 3 Remove the copyboard glass 4 Open the front cover and remove the up per inside cover and the inside cover AP kit 5 Remove the control panel 6 Remove the rear cover 7 Remove the inverter PCB unit 8 Move the No 1 mirror mount until its cable metal fixing 1 is visible through...

Page 95: ... A CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Figure 3 B505 Fix temporarily Wind seven times Steel ball 5 4 3 8 1 2 6 7 Put the steel ball into the hole in the pulley Try not to leave gaps between cable lengths 9 Rout the scanner cable through the pulley and hooks as shown in Figure 3 B505 ...

Page 96: ...PRINTED IN U S A 3 23 CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Figure 3 B506 Figure 3 B507 2 3 Front 2 3 Rear 10 Fit the mirror positioning tool 2 between the No 1 mirror mount and the No 2 mir ror mount then insert the pin 3 that comes with the mirror positioning tool ...

Page 97: ... EXPOSURE SYSTEM Figure 3 B508 Figure 3 B509 1 4 4 Front 4 4 1 Rear 11 Secure the cable metal fixing 1 tempo rarily fixed in place in 8 of step 9 using two screws 4 through the hole in the side plate 12 Detach the mirror positioning tool 13 Mount the parts back by performing steps 1 through 7 in reverse ...

Page 98: ...Removing the No 1 Mirror Mount Flex ible Cable Caution Do not disconnect the connector con nected to the No 1 mirror mount of the flexible cable unless you are replacing the No 1 mirror mount Do not discon nect the cable when cleaning the mirror 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the right glass retaining cover 2 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the cen ter ...

Page 99: ...A CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Warning label Flexible cable Figure 3 B513 Figure 3 B514 Claw Fixing plate before being released Fixing plate after being released 4 Peel off the warning label from the flex ible cable 5 Push in the claw to release the flexible cable fixing plate ...

Page 100: ...driver Flexible cable Boss Boss 6 While pushing the boss 2 pc with a small screwdriver disconnect the flexible cable carefully from the connector Caution When mounting be sure to butt the flexible cable fully against the rear and push in the fixing plate while hold ing it level When pushing in the fixing plate do not touch the reflecting plate ...

Page 101: ...w 1 2 3 4 C PCBs 1 Removing the Light Intensity Control PCB 1 Remove the right glass retainer 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the screw 1 from the No 1 mir ror mount then while pushing down the three claws free the intensity control PCB holder 4 Disconnect the connector 2 J165 and remove the screw 3 then detach the light intensity control PCB 4 ...

Page 102: ...RE SYSTEM Figure 3 C503 Figure 3 C504 1 2 2 3 2 2 1 Hook left Inverter unit Hook right Inverter unit 2 Removing the Inverter PCB 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the seven connectors 2 While re moving the hook of the mounting plate upward remove the inverter control as sembly 3 ...

Page 103: ...3 30 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 3 ORIGINAL EXPOSURE SYSTEM Figure 3 C505 4 4 5 4 4 3 Remove the six screws 4 and detach the inverter PCB 5 ...

Page 104: ...3 D501 Figure 3 D502 1 3 2 5 5 4 D Others 1 Removing the Original Size Sensor 1 2 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the right end 3 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the original sensor unit 3 4 Disconnect the connector 4 one each and detach the original sensor 1 2 5 ...

Page 105: ...ure 3 D503 Figure 3 D504 1 2 3 5 4 2 Removing the Original Size Sensor 3 4 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left edge 3 Remove the one screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the original sensor unit rear 3 4 Disconnect the connector 4 one each and detach the original sensor 3 4 5 ...

Page 106: ...ition Sensor 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Free the harness from the wire saddle 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then re move the screw 3 and detach the sensor mount 4 3 Disconnect the connector 5 and remove the screw 6 then detach the scanner home position sensor 7 4 Removing the Copyboard Glass 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Free the harness from the wire saddle 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the ...

Page 107: ...D510 7 6 5 3 Disconnect the connector 4 and detach the copyboard glass sensor 5 5 Removing the Image Leading Edge Sensor 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Free the harness from the wire saddle 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then re move the screw 3 and detach the sensor mount 4 3 Disconnect the connector 5 and remove the screw 6 then detach the image lead ing edge sensor 7 ...

Page 108: ...POSURE SYSTEM Figure 3 D511 Figure 3 D512 1 2 3 2 6 Removing the Standard White Plate 1 Remove the right glass retaining cover 2 Remove the copyboard glass 3 Remove the small cover 1 for the stan dard white plate with a flat blade screw driver 4 Remove the two screws 2 and detach the standard white cover 3 ...

Page 109: ...Figure 3 D513 5 Remove the four screws 4 and detach the standard white plate 5 7 After Replacing the Standard White Plate 1 Execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ in service mode 2 When all items under COPIER ADJUST CCD and data under COPIER ADJUST LAMP L DATA have been updated record the results on the service label 4 4 5 ...

Page 110: ...each associated part is turned on I OUTLINE 4 1 II ANALOG IMAGE PROCESSING 4 4 A Outline 4 4 III DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING 4 6 A Outline 4 6 B Image Procesing Functional Block 4 7 C Shading Correction 4 9 D Line Conversion 4 10 E Editing 4 11 F Density Processing 4 12 G Binary Processing 4 15 H Image Memory 4 17 I Detecting the Orientation of Originals 4 19 J Black Pixel Count 4 20 IV DISASSEMBLY A...

Page 111: ...s 1 Number of pixels 7500 Size of a CCD pixel 7 7 µm 1 Priority on speed by ABC processing 2 Priority on image quality by pre scanning 1 Shading adjustment in service mode 2 Shading correction executed for each copy 1 Text photo mode text mode by random error diffusion R ED method 2 Print photo mode by screen dither processing 1 Original orientation detection 2 Black pixel count 1 Page Memory DRAM...

Page 112: ...re 4 101 Functional Construction CCD PCB IP PCB MFC PCB To laser driver PCB CCD A D conversion Digital image processing for scanner input Digital image processing for PDL input Data transfer control Memory control Analog image processing System motherboard PDL board Hard disk Image server Memory board Analog image processing block Digital image processing block Compression decompression Page memor...

Page 113: ...ited to those relating to image processing PCB IP image processor PCB MFC multi function controller PCB System motherboard Memory board DRAM Image server hard disk PDL board CCD PCB Description Digital processing for scanner input Digital image processing PDL input Relays image signals Page memory of last images Stores image data that has been read in sequence Converts PDL data into a format that ...

Page 114: ... Digital image signal Digital image signal ABC ON CCD ON CCD CLK AD CLK AD LD AD DT R CLK HSYNC CLK DT CLK LD P LNG P WD CCD PCB CCD drive control sync pulse generation Image processing PCB 8 8 Shading correction Even numbered pixels Even numbered pixels Odd numbered pixels Odd numbered pixels AE procession ABC circuit J1502 J1105 40 46 47 48 34 35 38 39 30 31 40 46 47 48 34 35 38 39 30 31 Communi...

Page 115: ...on Setting range 0 to 400 a change of 12 causes a shift of 1 mm Lower setting Higher setting Original Vertical size plate Read start position COPIER ADJUST AE AE TBL real time AE mode text density adjustment Enter a value to adjust the density correction curve for real time AE mode in 10 steps Setting range 0 to 9 default at 4 White Original density A lower setting produces lighter text Copy densi...

Page 116: ...r PDL input Enlargement reduction main sub scanning direction 2 Data transfer control Relays image signals Converts PDL data into a format that can be processed by the copier Page Memory 18 MB equivalent of 4 A4 originals not compressed Stores image data that has been read in sequence 2 GB 1 920 A4 originals compressed 1 Digital Image Processing for scanner input Shading correction Enlargement red...

Page 117: ...hading correction Line conversion Smoothing Line conversion Data transfer control Compression de compression Even numbered odd numbered pixels Even numbered odd numbered line Frame erasing on scanner input data by scanner clock pules 1 Original frame erasing 2 Book frame erasing 3 Hole image erasing Frame erasing on data after image memory output by printer clock pulses 1 Sheet frame erasing 2 Bin...

Page 119: ...te and standard white paper Data for gain offset adjustment Analog image signal Even numbered pixels Determining the Shading Correction Value for each copy 1 Offset Correction Stores the difference between 0 and the output of each CCD cell while the fluorescent lamp is off and the value will be used as the correction value for correction of variation among the cells 2 Gain Correction Turns on the ...

Page 120: ...al Diagram of Line Conversion 1 2 2 3 4 4 5 6 6 7 8 8 7500 7500 7498 7498 1 3 5 7 7499 7499 7497 7497 3750 pixels Even numbered pixels Odd numbered pixels 1st line CCD CCD PCB IP PCB Analog image processing block Shading correction Line conversion Even numbered odd numbered pixels Even numbered odd numbered lines 6 7498 1 3 5 2 4 7500 7499 7497 7500 pixels 1st line odd numbered line for laser A 6 ...

Page 121: ...ocessing block performs the following editing functions 1 Enlargement reduction Part 2 Chapter 3 2 6 1 main scanning direction 2 Edge emphasis Part 2 Chapter 3 2 8 1 3 Negative positive reversal Part 2 Chapter 3 2 6 8 4 Frame Erasing 5 Rotation 6 Shift Part 2 Chapter 3 2 6 2 7 Layout Part 2 Chapter 3 2 6 3 8 Image synthesis Part 2 Chapter 3 2 6 10 ...

Page 122: ...input image data PDL input image data Figure 4 304 Flow of Density Processing Edge emphasis LOG conversion LOG table Density adjustment Fvalue table AE processing AE table Binary processing Multiple value data Binary data Density adjustment table Density adjustment when reading data Density adjustment laser power developing bias Density adjustment when printing data Selects a table to suit the tex...

Page 123: ...Service Mode COPIER ADJUST DENS DENS ADJ copy density correction If the copy image is foggy or the high density area is fuzzy use this mode to correct the F value table Setting range 0 to 9 default at 3 White Copy density Black Original density White F9 F1 A lower setting decreases fogging A higher setting reduces fuzzy images ...

Page 124: ...9 3 5 7 20V F value Density Darker Lighter 0 8 1 0 1 2 1 5 The developing bias is reduced earlier than the laser power to prevent fogging Corrects the laser powerand the developing bias according to the selected F value The laser power is increased to ensure firm toner deposit The developing bias is not increased to prevent fogging 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 8 0 9 1 0 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 5 40V 30V 10V ...

Page 125: ...fusion method 1 Dither Screen Method Image data is subjected to screen processing so that the images may be produced in 256 grada tions out of binary data Figure 4 305A Conceptual Diagram of the Dither Screen Method 4 pixels 8 pixels In this area as many as 16 different density patterns may be created As such an area consisting of 8 4 pixels enables creating of 256 16 16 density patterns The black...

Page 126: ...igure 4 305B Conceptual Diagram of the Error Diffusion Method Pixel in question e g density at 135 Error Diffusion Matrix fixed pattern 0 2 0 1 0 05 0 03 0 05 0 05 0 01 0 01 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 1 Black 255 Slice level 128 White 0 Error Pixel in question density at 135 Step 2 Step 1 α α At this time a value that brings the sum to 0 is added to the adjacent pixel to prevent an error caused by the random n...

Page 127: ...rd Frame erasing Black density count Data transfer control To image server 1 For main scanning direction control is based on synchronization with the BD signal For sub scanning direction control is based on synchronization with the PTOP signal image leading edge signal generated from the registration ON signal 2 Controls the destination of image data Hard disk Page memory to enable synchronization...

Page 128: ...ory thereby preventing jams in memory otherwise caused by jams in the feeder COPIER FUNCTION HRD DISK FOR MAT hard disk formatting Use it to initialize the hard disk Use it on a normal hard disk Use it when replacing the hard disk or at time of shipment from the factory Execution takes about 1 sec COPIER FUNCTION HRD DISK SCAN DISK hard disk scanning Use it to check the hard disk for errors or to ...

Page 129: ...riginal in the ADF Figure 4 308 Conceptual Diagram of Detection IP PCB Flash ROM Image data Communicates the result of detection to the IP PCB 1 0 2 90 3 180 4 270 5 Not known output as is 8 2 0 90 180 270 All image data is read and text areas are extracted The text data in storage and the fonts in the dictionary are matched to identify the orientation of the text Image data is subjected to binary...

Page 130: ...data are counted to obtain an estimate of the amount of toner on paper Using the resulting data the copier optimizes the current level of the separation DC bias Figure 4 309 Range of Counting Black Pixels Image leading edge 40 mm Original The black pixels within a width of 40 mm along the image leading edge are counted to obtain an estimate of the amount of toner per unit area ...

Page 131: ... the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical ...

Page 132: ...STEM Figure 4 A401 1 2 3 Figure 4 A402 4 Claw A CCD PCB 1 Removing the CCD PCB 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left end 3 Remove the one screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the original sensor unit rear 3 4 Release the front and rear claws and de tach the CCD cover 4 ...

Page 133: ... Remove the three fixing screws 5 and disconnect the connector 6 then detach the flat cable 7 from the CCD PCB and detach the CCD unit 8 2 After Replacing the CCD Unit 1 Execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ in service mode 2 When all items under COPIER ADJUST CCD and data under COPIER ADJUST LAMP L DATA have been updated record the results on the service label ...

Page 134: ...ure 4 B401 Figure 4 B402 1 2 3 5 4 4 B Image Processor PCB 1 Removing the Image Processor PCB 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left edge 3 Remove the one screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the original sensor unit rear 3 4 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the flat cable 5 ...

Page 135: ...ocessor cover 7 Caution At this time take care not to damage the flat cable removed in step 4 6 Disconnect the seven connectors 9 of the image processor PCB 8 and remove the six screws 10 then detach the image processor PCB 8 Caution At this time take care not to damage the connector 12 of the image processor PCB and the original orientation PCB 11 2 After Replacing the Image Processor PCB See G E...

Page 136: ...r 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the system box 3 Remove the system cover face plate and partition See Figures 9 K701 and K702 4 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and re move the four screws 2 then detach the hard disk image server 3 together with the mounting plate 5 Remove the four screws 4 and take out the hard disk image sever 3 2 After Replacing the Hard Disk image server See G Electrical Parts...

Page 137: ...ESSING SYSTEM Figure 4 D401 Figure 4 D402 2 1 1 3 2 2 5 5 4 5 6 5 D Others 1 Removing the System Motherboard 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the three flat cables 1 and three screws 2 then open the system box 3 3 Disconnect the three connectors 4 and remove the four screws 5 then detach the motherboard 6 ...

Page 138: ...oard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left edge 3 Remove the original sensor unit rear 4 Remove the CCD cover 5 Remove the CCD unit 6 Remove the image processor cover 7 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the memory board 3 from the image pro cessor PCB 2 3 Removing the Various Printer Boards 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the printer board unit 3 from the sys...

Page 139: ...EM Figure 4 D405 4 4 4 4 5 Figure 4 D406 1 2 3 3 Remove the seven screws 4 and detach the printer board 5 4 Removing the Original Detection PCB 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Move the No 1 mirror mount to the left end 3 Remove the one screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the original sensor unit rear 3 ...

Page 140: ...E PROCESSING SYSTEM Figure 4 D407 4 Claw Figure 4 D408 Figure 4 D409 5 8 5 5 6 7 4 Release the front and rear claws of the CCD cover 4 and detach the CCD cover 4 5 Remove the three fixing screws 5 and disconnect the connector 6 then detach the flat cable 7 from the CCD PCB and detach the CCD unit 8 ...

Page 141: ...crews 11 and detach the image processor cover 12 Caution Take care not to damage the flat cable re moved in step 6 8 Remove the three screws 13 and detach the original orientation detection PCB 14 Caution Take care not to damage the connector 15 of the image processor PCB and the original orientation detection PCB 14 Figure 4 D410 Figure 4 D411 10 9 9 11 11 12 11 11 Figure 4 D412 13 13 15 14 ...

Page 142: ...ical systems and timing at which each associated part is turned on I OPERATIONS 5 1 A Outline 5 1 B Basic Sequence of Operations laser exposure system 5 4 II GENERATING THE BD SIGNAL 5 5 A Outline 5 5 B Flow of the BD Signal 5 5 III LASER DRIVER PCB 5 7 A Outline 5 7 B Controlling Laser Activation 5 8 C Controlling the Laser Intensity 5 10 IV CONTROLLING THE LASER SCANNER MOTOR 5 12 A Outline 5 12...

Page 143: ...rol Item Description 1 APC control 2 Optimum intensity control to suit the surface potential of the drum 1 Constant speed rotation control 2 Full speed wait rotation switching Main scanning direction by BD signal based on laser B Sub scanning direction by PTOP signal image leading edge signal in page memory By 2 laser semiconductors laser A B Laser scanning Synchronization control Laser scanner mo...

Page 144: ... View Table 5 102 Components Photosensitive drum BD PCB BD mirror 8 facet mirror Laser scanner motor Imaging lens Laser unit Laser mirror Laser driver PCB 80µm A B 18 pixels 760µm Laser A Laser A Laser B Laser B Component Laser semiconductor Laser scanner motor Polygon mirror RD mirror BD detection PCB Laser driver PCB Laser scanner motor driver PCB Description Visible laser light 675 nm 2 beams D...

Page 145: ...e drum thereby preventing interference of laser beams Figure 5 103 80µm 760µm 18 pixels Related Service Mode COPIER ADJUST LASER IP DELAY image processor PCB display input If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the values recorded on the label attached to the PCB COPIER ADJUST LASER LA DELAY laser unit delay value input If you have repl...

Page 146: ...ch ON Copy Start key ON 195 C Image leading edge signal Laser A Laser B PRINT INTR PSTBY LSTR STBY Laser B BD signal Laser scanner motor Wait rotation Wait activation Activation for imaging 1 scan Wait activation Wait rotation Detects the laser B Activation for potential control Image leading edge signal in page memory When the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 195 C full speed rota...

Page 147: ...e drum BD PCB BD mirror 8 facet mirror Laser scanner motor Imaging lens Laser unit Laser mirror Laser driver PCB BD detection PCB Image processor PCB BD SGNL J3701 GND 5V GND 5V PSYNC B VIDEO B VIDEO A CLK B CLK A PSYNC A 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 CLK B generation Laser driver CLK A generation Memory control Sync signal generation Reads from memory based on this sync signal Generates sync signals for th...

Page 148: ...u have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the adjustment value Setting range 300 to 300 Note that the laser A move in sync with the laser B front Lower setting Higher setting rear Laser B 1 If the BD signal is not detected within a specific period of time 2 See the descriptions under III C Controlling the Laser Intensity E100 BD error Related E...

Page 149: ...struction Image processor PCB J1106 J1107 J1354 J1353 1 16 17 20 21 24 25 40 VIDEO B VIDEO A CLK B CLK A Image signals for the laser B Laser driver PCB 2 Laser driver PCB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Relay PCB Clock pulses for the laser B 10 18 1 9 10 18 1 9 19 30 1 16 17 20 21 24 25 40 Light intensity control signal Activation control signal 5V 8V 8V GND GND GND J1301 J1714 LD B LD A Laser B Laser A Intensity m...

Page 150: ... D B RST B Not used Not used SH D A BSH B BSH A SH B SH A RST A LD DWN LD EN B LD EN A LD OFF B LD OFF A Not used Laser driver PCB 2 Laser driver PCB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Relay PCB 5V 8V 8V GND GND GND J1714 J1301 J1354 LD B LD A Laser B Laser A Intensity monitor Intensity control signal To LD A B To LD A B When the laser OFF signal is 1 the laser turns off Sampling during wait activation Sampling during...

Page 151: ...IER ADJUST LASER LA PWR A B laser power adjustment input If you have replaced the laser unit or the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the label attached to the laser unit COPIER FUNCTION LASER POWER A B laser power adjustment activation Use this mode to turn on the laser when checking laser activation ...

Page 152: ...PCB 2 Laser driver PCB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Relay PCB CS Selects either laser A EEPROM or laser B EEPROM for writing 1 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 30 5V 8V 8V GND GND GND J1714 J1301 J1354 LD A Laser B Laser A Intensity monitor EEPROM For laser A EEPROM For laser B When the laser intently is as specified 1 Clock pulses for writing to and reading from the EEPROM 1 2 2 2 2 1 LD B To EEPROM 1 1 The inte...

Page 153: ...R 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM The value LD DT1 written to the EEPROM and the value read LD DT2 do not match E102 EEPROM write error 1 See the descriptions under II Generating the BD Signal 2 The intensity of the laser fails to reach a specific level E100 laser intensity error Related Error Code ...

Page 154: ...onal Block Diagram SP SEL J503 J762 J761 J763 Drive signal 38V 0V J1715 LM RDY LM ON 0V 10 9 8 7 1 2 3 4 11 1 3 2 1 Laser scanner motor driver Laser scanner motor Relay PCB DC controller PCB M4 When 0 the laser scanner motor turns on When the motor speed reaches a specific level 0 When 0 full speed rotation when 1 wait state rotation Related error code 1 LM RDY goes 1 when the motor is rotating i ...

Page 155: ...he parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical co...

Page 156: ...inal sensor unit rear See Figure 4 B401 4 Remove the CCD unit See Figure 4 A403 5 Remove the image processor PCB See Figure 4 B404 6 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the original orientation detection PCB 2 1 1 2 Figure 5 A501 Figure 5 A502 4 3 3 3 3 3 4 5 7 Remove the eight screws 3 and discon nect the three connectors 4 then detach the laser scanner unit 5 2 After Replacing the Laser Unit Se...

Page 157: ...Removing the BD Unit 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the process unit See Figures 6 D701 through D702 3 Remove the three screws 1 and discon nect the three connectors 2 then re move the fan primary charging scanner cooling polygon mirror unit 3 4 Remove the screws 4 and slide out the BD unit 5 to the front Caution Be sure to mark the position of the screw 4 with a scriber before loosening it ...

Page 158: ...5 16 COPYRIGHT 2000 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 5 LASER EXPOSURE SYSTEM 5 Disconnect the connector 6 and remove the BD unit Figure 5 B504 6 5 ...

Page 159: ...ING THE CHARGING MECHANISMS 6 16 A Controlling the Primary Charging Mechanism 6 16 B Dust Collecting Roller Bias 6 20 C Controlling the Pre Transfer Charging Mechanism 6 21 D Controlling the Transfer Guide Bias 6 25 E Controlling the Transfer Charging Mechanism 6 27 F Controlling Separation Charging 6 32 IV DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY 6 36 A Outline 6 36 B Controlling the Developing Assembly 6 37 C Contro...

Page 160: ... service mode DC constant voltage control determined by potential control AC constant voltage control ON OFF control only DC constant voltage control determined by potential control DC constant voltage control ON OFF control only 1000 V AC constant current control fuzzy control by an environment sensor DC constant voltage control DC constant voltage control switched according to temperature humidi...

Page 161: ... 101 cross section Figure 6 101 shows the major components of the image formation system Set up cartridge Developing assembly Hopper Dust collecting roller Pre transfer charging assembly Transfer guide Transfer charging assembly Separation charging assembly Cleaner unit Pre exposure Primary charging assembly Potential sensor ...

Page 162: ...ging bias AC DC Potential sensor Main motor M1 At 200 C WMUPR ends The start timing varies as follows according to the environmental conditions detected at time when the control panel power switch is turned on 1 If low humidity not started 2 If normal temperature high humidity as soon as the control panel power switch is turned on Main power switch ON Each voltage is applied in sequence to stabili...

Page 163: ...ource of paper is selected the signal is generated to start advance pickup Potential control is used during INTR for the following 1 10 min after the main power switch has been turned on 2 60 min after the main power switch has been turned on For 4 on 1 or other layout processing the signal is generated after reading all originals Printing is ready after a single line of data has been written in t...

Page 164: ...ning the optimum laser output VL control 3 Determining the optimum developing bias DC Vdc control Figure 6 201 shows the construction of the control system Primary charging wire Potential sensor Grid wire Laser light Developing cylinder DC controller PCB Laser driver PCB High voltage DC PCB DC bias DC bias DC bias Control signal Control signal D e t e c t i o n s i g n a l J502 J3 11 12 13 14 4 3 ...

Page 165: ...n power switch is turned on A series of charging operations is executed to stabilize the potential of the drum To prevent stray toner the developing bias is turned off for non image areas Optimum laser output determined Transparency mode potential control 1 The control panel power switch is turned on 2 The front door is opened closed 10 min 60 min The charging characteristics are likely to have st...

Page 166: ...OFST potential sensor offset adjustment For adjustments see descriptions on electrical parts in Chapter 13 II Standards and Adjustments COPIER ADJUST V CONT EPOTOFST potential sensor offset value input COPIER ADJUST V CONT VL OFST VL target potential offset input COPIER ADJUST V CONT VD OFST VD target potential offset value input If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM ...

Page 167: ...rol will start The relationship between the surface potential of the drum VD and the gird bias is obtained based on measurements taken several times Charging characteristic curve A grid bias VG needed to attain the target VD is selected Potential control sequence started Primary charging bias DC Measurement targetVD Figure 6 205 Sequence of Operations corrective control WMUPR WMUP STBY 195 C 200 C...

Page 168: ... surface potential of the drum VL and the laser output is determined based on measurements taken several times If the target VL is obtained at this measurement control is ended otherwise corrective control is stated Activation using the reference output determined at time of shipment Activation at an output 10 lower than the reference output The laser output P needed to attain the target VL is det...

Page 169: ...ential determined Laser Grid bias Vg Vg Pw Pw Potential control sequence started VD VL Vdc Vdc is computed based on this VD Vdc VD Vback 120 V Optimum grid bias determined Vg VD Vdc Photosensitive drum Potential sensor Developing cylinder Optimum laser output determined F Determining the Optimum Developing Bias An optimum developing bias Vdc is computed based on the optimum drum surface potential ...

Page 170: ...rid bias Vg Pw Pwohp Pwohp VD VL VLohp Potential determined Vg Pw Vdc 100V VL corrective value VD corrective value Vdc corrective value Using the target value for transparency mode potential control sequence is executed Potential control sequence started Transparency potential control sequence started Transparency mode laser power determined COPIER OPTION BODY OHP CNT Set Main power switch OFF ON ...

Page 171: ...ing printing PDL input Density correction during printing scanner input During operation in high humidity mode To enable reproduction of fine lines PDL data from a computer to suit the needs of the user To attain density levels suited to the needs of the user To prevent decreases in density caused by a lower developing efficiency because of moist toner or a lower transfer efficiency caused by mois...

Page 172: ...s narrower than a single particle of toner The laser power developing bias is corrected to suit the F value setting The laser power has reached the upper limit requiring correction of the developing bias to increase the contrast Laser power correction value Vdc correction value VD correction value Potential control sequence started COPIER OPTION BODY CNT W PR density setting mode on off during pri...

Page 173: ...ower is increased to increase the density Laser power correction value Vdc correction value VD correction value Extra high humidity Potential control sequence started The laser power Vdc is corrected to suit the environment 1 correct the laser power developing bias to suit the environment default 0 disable correction of the target value 2 extra low humidity mode See the above figure 3 low humidity...

Page 174: ...8 x 1 0 x 1 2 x 1 5 The laser power Vdc is corrected according to the F setting Laser power correction value Vdc correction value Potential control sequence started F value COPIER OPTION USER PM DENS density setting mode on off during printing 1 correct the target value to enable variation of density during printing default 0 disable the mechanism used to vary the density during printing Related S...

Page 175: ...h voltage DC PCB J510A J723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN PR CNT GRD CNT PR ERR GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB Primary charging wire Grid wire T601 J731 3V 11V 12V 1600µA 800µA 900V 400V PR CNT 3V 11V GRD CNT 12V Grid bias Primary charging bias The primary charging bias varies as follows according to PR CNT potential The grid bias ...

Page 176: ...de to sup press the problem Standard mode Suppression mode 1 Suppression mode 2 0 1 2 300 600 400 400 400 Grid bias V 600 550 400 Setting Primary charging current correction value µA VD target value v A higher output suppresses unevenness A lower output suppresses uneven charging efficiency on the surface of the drum COPIER OPTION BODY PR SEL potential unevenness suppression mode selection 0 stand...

Page 177: ...or MSW4 Primary charging wire cleaning motor M8 When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the rear When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the front When the wire cleaner reaches the home position 0 1 The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 C or lower when the control panel power switch is turned on 2 The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode 3 At the end of LSTR after making 2000 ...

Page 178: ...ER ADJUST HV PRI GDID grid bias output adjustment value input If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Related Service Mode An overcurrent is detected PR ERR 1 because of leakage E065 primary charging output error Related Error Code ...

Page 179: ... collecting roller bias Figure 6 303 shows the construction of the dust collecting roller bias control system Figure 6 303 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB J510A DC 1000V J723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB Dust collecting roller J732 1 2 3 High voltage DC PCB When 1 high voltage ou...

Page 180: ...42 J721 J734 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN HVAC EN GND GND HVAC ON 24VP PTDC CNT PT SP ERR High voltage DC PCB GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB Pre transfer charging wire 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 High voltage AC PCB High voltage AC transformer When 1 high voltage DC output is ready 300µA 3V 11V 12V PTDC CNT The current level of ...

Page 181: ...ata from the environment sensor Figure 6 305 Pre Transfer Current Output Table Pre transfer current µA Low humidity High humidity COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY fuzzy control ON OFF Related Service Mode 0 enable fuzzy control default 1 low humidity mode The pre transfer charging current is lower than the standard level 2 normal humidity mode 3 high humidity mode The pre transfer charging current is high...

Page 182: ...or MSW3 Pre transfer charging wire cleaning motor M7 When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the front When the wire cleaner reaches the home position 0 When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the rear 1 The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 C or lower when the control panel power switch is turned on 2 The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode 3 At the end of LSTR after making ...

Page 183: ...vice Mode COPIER ADJUST HV TR PRE TR pre transfer charging current output adujstment input If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the value on the service label An overcurrent is detected PT SP ERR 1 because of leakage E068 pre transfer charging output error Related Error Code ...

Page 184: ...ied to the transfer guide The transfer guide charging mechanism is controlled for the following 1 Transfer guide bias constant voltage 2 Output to suit the environment Figure 6 307 shows the construction of the transfer guide bias DC controller PCB J510A DC 600V 200V J723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN FGD ON GND GND 1 2 3 4 Re...

Page 185: ...ed in sync with the rotation of the photosensitive drum The photosensitive drum is rotating yet paper is not being fed Normally 600 V is applied to prevent adhesion of toner to the transfer guide In a high humidity environment paper tends to absorb moisture lower resistance charging the paper in excess to affect transfer faulty transfer as such the output is decreased COPIER OPTION BODY TRNSG SW t...

Page 186: ...uction of the transfer charging control system Figure 6 309 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB J510A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN TR CNT TR ERR GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB Transfer charging wire T701 3V 11V 12V 650µA TR CNT The transfer current varies as follows according to the TR CNT potential Transfer curre...

Page 187: ...on the data from the environment sensor Figure 6 310 Transfer Current Output Table Transfer current µA 150 650 Low humidity High humidity COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY fuzzy control ON OFF 0 enable fuzzy control default 1 low humidity mode The transfer current is lower than the standard level 2 normal humidity mode 3 high humidity mode The transfer current is higher than the standard level Selecting 1 ...

Page 188: ...rent is varied over a width of 20 mm along the trailing edge of paper Low humidity Normal humidity High humidity Single sided copying 220 150 Double sided copying Transfer current correction µA In a low humidity environment paper tends to dry up collecting excess charges high resistance to counter the output is reduced When making a double sided print paper will absorb fixing oil and tend to colle...

Page 189: ... separation charging wire cleaning motor M9 Separation charging assembly When the wire cleaner is at the home position 0 When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the rear When 1 the wire cleaner moves toward the front 1 The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 C or lower when the control panel power switch is turned on 2 The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode 3 At the end of ...

Page 190: ...side of double sided print plain paper COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR N2 output adjustment on 2nd side of double sided print plain paper If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Related Service Mode An overcurrent is detected TR ERR 1 because of leakage E069 transfer charging output error Related error Code...

Page 191: ... J742 J721 J734 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN HVAC EN 24VP GND GND HVAC CNT HVAC ON SPDC CNT PT SP ERR HVAC CNT High voltage DC PCB GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB 4 2 1 1 2 3 4 3 5 5 1 2 3 4 5 12KVPP 8KVPP 3V 11V 12V HVAC CNT The AC bias voltage level varies according to the HVAC CNT potential Separation charging wire High voltage ...

Page 192: ...eposit High humidity Separation current µA Low humidity If the toner deposit is high the current level is decreased to prevent double transfer In a low humidity environment paper tends to dry up collecting excess charges high resistance as such the output is decreased If the toner deposit is little the output is increased to prevent separation fault COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY fuzzy control ON OFF Re...

Page 193: ...s decreased upon detection of leakage COPIER OPTION BODY SP MODE Set Low voltage mode 10 5 kvpp 9 8 kvpp 9 8 kvpp 9 2 kvpp NG E068 indicated Main power switch OFF ON Upon detection of leakage cur rent the output is decreased and tried again COPIER OPTION BODY SP MODE Related Service Mode 0 standard mode default AC output is 10 5 kVpp 1 low voltage mode AC output is 9 8 kVpp select if errors caused...

Page 194: ...de COPIER ADJUST HV SP SP N1 output adjustment for single sided print or 1st side of double side print plain paper COPIER ADJUST HV SP SP N2 output adjustment on 2nd side of double sided print plain paper If you have replaced the image processor PCB or initialized the RAM on the image processor PCB enter the value recorded on the service label ...

Page 195: ...uction of the Developing Assembly M1 M18 M6 CL1 CL4 Toner cartridge Magnet roller Toner sensor TS inside the hopper Hopper Main motor Developing cylinder Toner feeding screws Toner feeder motor inside the cartridge Toner sensor TS3 inside the developing assembly Developing cylinder clutch Toner lower limit sensor TS2 inside the hopper Magnet roller drive clutch Moves toner from the hopper to the d...

Page 196: ... control system MGR CL ON 24VU DEV CL ON 24VU J512A MM FG 0V MM ON 5V 0V J514B 0V HM ON J504B M1 M18 CL4 To CL1 Magnet roller Toner feeding screw Toner stirring screw Main motor Developing cylinder clutch Developing cylinder CL1 DC controller PCB 1 13 14 18 19 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 1 11 12 13 14 The motor turns on in response to 24 V Toner feed motor inside the hopper Magnet roller drive clutch When 0 ...

Page 197: ...or fault An overcurrent caused by an overload on the motor has been detected twice Related Error Code CRGM ON CRGDR OPN 5V 0V 5V CRG DTC DC controller PCB M6 Toner cartridge motor drive switch Cartridge sensor Toner cartridge cover open closed sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 14 J512B PS59 MSW1 Toner feed motor inside the cartridge When the toner cartridge door is closed 1 12 V is applied to turn on the cartr...

Page 198: ...1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN DEV DC CNT DEV AC ON GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB Developing cylinder J732 500V 3V 11V 12V DEV DC CNT Developing DC bias The developing DC bias varies as follows according to the DEV DC CNT potential image area Non image area High voltage DC PCB When 1 developing AC bias is generated AC output 1000...

Page 199: ...ER ADJUST DEVELOP DE OFST developing DC bias offset level offset adjustment COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP DE NO DC sheet to sheet distance developing DC bias output input If you have replaced the MFC PCB or initialized the RAM on the MFC PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Settings 0 to 500 Settings 50 to 50 Lighter images Lower setting Higher setting Darker images Related Service Mode ...

Page 200: ...r TS3 inside the developing assembly Purpose To keep the toner inside the hopper to a specific level Operation If the absence of toner is detected the toner feeding screw inside the toner cartridge is rotated to supply the hopper with toner Purpose To keep the toner inside the developing assembly to a specific level Operation If the absence of toner is detected the magnet roller is rotated to supp...

Page 201: ...99 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A Figure 6 406 Construction of the Control System TS2 0V TS1 5V J504B 5V 0V 5V TS3 0V DC controller PCB TS1 TS3 T S 2 1 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16 17 19 When the absence of toner is detected 0 ...

Page 202: ...oping assembly If the toner supply sequence has not ended at the time the machine operation ends the toner supply sequence will be resumed next time machine operation is started The toner supply sequence is ended if the presence of toner is detected for 0 7 sec or more The toner supply sequence is started when the absence of toner is detected for 0 3 sec or more If supply is continued without an i...

Page 203: ...ended at the time the machine operation ends the toner supply sequence will be continued until it ends If the presence of toner is detected for 1 5 sec or more the toner supply sequence ends If the absence of toner is detected for 0 5 sec or more the toner supply sequence is started If the absence of toner is detected for 210 sec or more a message to prompt toner supply will be indicated on the to...

Page 204: ... 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Figure 6 501 Construction of the Drum Cleaner Unit V DRUM CLEANER UNIT A Outline Part 2 Chapter 5 9 9 1 Figure 6 501 shows the construction of the drum cleaner unit Pre exposure lamp Cleaning blade Magnet roller Separation claw Waste toner feeding screw M1 Main motor ...

Page 205: ...ion of the control system used to monitor the waste toner case Figure 6 502 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB Waste toner case front J514B J514A J512B MM FG 0V 5V WT RCK WT FULL 5V 0V MM ON 5V 0V 1 4 3 2 5 6 7 14 1 3 2 14 1 13 14 M1 Main motor Waste toner case full sensor PS19 Waste toner lock sensor MSW2 As toner collects the case becomes heavy causing the waste toner case sens...

Page 206: ...7 CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Related Error Code The waste toner lock sensor MSW2 has remained on for 4 sec or more E013 waste toner lock After the waste toner case full sensor PS19 has turned on 50 000 prints or more have been made without any action E019 waste toner case full ...

Page 207: ... SW2 Heater switch SW3 1 2 3 4 5 SW1 D HTR ON HT TEMP AC N AC H 0V Drum heater H3 Thermistor Fuse Main power switch Front door switch AC Input H AC Input N Heater driver PCB Heater temperature control PCB When the heater switch is turned on the heater will remain on at all times operating independently of the main power switch When the heater switch is off the heater operates in sync with the main...

Page 208: ... the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical ...

Page 209: ... the process unit from the copier keep the photosensitive drum away from light To do so use the photosensitive drum protective sheet or wrap it in six or more sheets of A3 copy paper 2 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum near a window i e do not subject it to direct sunshine 3 Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in places subjected to high tempera ture hig...

Page 210: ...moving the Photosensitive Drum 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the process unit See Figures 6 D701 through D703 3 Remove the three screws 1 and discon nect the three connectors 2 then detach the auxiliary plate 3 4 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the positioning holder 5 Figure 6 A701 Figure 6 A702 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 5 4 ...

Page 211: ...topper 9 then lift off the pho tosensitive drum 10 while sliding it to the front in the direction of the arrow Points to Note When Removing the Process Unit 1 When you have removed the process unit do not rotate the photosensitive drum in the opposite direction Do ing so could bend the blade 2 Do not rotate the magnet roller of the cleaner unit Doing so will cause leakage of toner Figure 6 A703 Fi...

Page 212: ... A705 Figure 6 A706 3 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Heater 1 Remove the photosensitive drum from the copier 2 Remove the two mounting screws 1 and detach the flange 2 at the front then dis connect the connector 3 3 Pull out the flange at the rear 4 and de tach the power supply unit 5 from the photosensitive drum 1 2 3 4 5 ...

Page 213: ...er side of the drum causing the flange to get stuck if pushed at an angle When mounting the flange push it in a parallel direction to the drum without applying excessive force 4 Mounting the Photosensitive Drum Unit Mount the photosensitive drum by revers ing the steps used to remove it with the follow ing in mind Caution Be sure to attach the bearing stopper as soon as you have placed the photose...

Page 214: ...e Process Unit 1 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp Unit 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the process unit Caution Cover the drum with A3 paper or the like when you have slid out the process unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two screws 2 then detach the pre exposure unit 3 4 Remove the three screws 4 and detach the pre exposure holder 5 then detach the pre exposure lamp 6 4 5 6 ...

Page 215: ...g glass 2 then remove the screw 3 and detach the po tential sensor unit 4 Caution It is difficult to pull out the potential sen sor in a horizontal direction As shown shift it down once and then slide it out to facilitate the work 5 Remove the two screws 5 and detach the potential sensor cover 6 then detach the potential sensor 7 Caution Replace the potential sensor simulta neously with the potent...

Page 216: ... Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 while shift ing the charging assembly fixing plate 2 to the left slide out the primary charging assembly 3 4 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly 1 Open the front cover 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Disconnect the connector 1 while shift ing the charging assembly fixing plate 2 to the right slide out the pre trans...

Page 217: ...er 1 Remove the pre transfer charging assem bly 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the motor cover 2 3 Remove the dust collecting roller arm 3 and the twisted spring 4 then detach the dusts collecting roller 5 6 Removing the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the fixing feeding assembly 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the charging cover 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 ...

Page 218: ...onnec tor 5 and detach the transfer separation charging assembly 6 Points to Note When Mounting The transfer separation charging as sembly is equipped with a positioning boss on its front and rear When mounting the assembly be sure to hook the bosses on the cut offs in the stay If the charging assembly cleaner is on the front side the home position detect ing microswitch can become damaged be sure...

Page 219: ...e used around the photosensitive drum each of a 0 06mm diam eter 2 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly 1 Move the clip mount 1 to the rearmost position and remove the screw 2 to de tach the support plate 4 of the wire cleaner motor shaft 3 then take out the clip mount 1 through the opening in the shielding plate 5 together with the wire cleaner motor shaft 3 2 Pick the wire ...

Page 220: ... 6 C704 Figure 6 C705 3 Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Transfer Separation Charging Assembly 1 Remove the transfer separation charging assembly 2 Move the felt holder 1 to the frontmost position 3 Remove the motor cover 2 together with the motor 4 Remove the E ring 3 and pull the lead screw 4 to the front and then up to de tach 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 221: ... charging assembly 1 Remove the screw one each 1 and de tach the shielding plates left right 2 To prevent deformation slack of the pri mary charging assembly be sure to work on the left and right shielding plates sepa rately Do not loosen the screws on both left and right shielding plates 2 Remove the wire cleaner Caution For other charging assemblies remove the lids 2 pcs 3 Free a length of about...

Page 222: ...e charging wire electrode In the case of the pre transfer charging assem bly hook the spring on the pin at the front Caution Check the following The charging wire must not be bent or twisted The charging wire must be in the V groove of the charging wire positioned 9 Mount the cushion at the front of the charging wire except the primary charg ing assembly 10 Mount the shielding plate left right Cau...

Page 223: ...ry Charging Assembly 1 Check to make sure that the four screws used to keep the blocks and the shielding plate front rear in place then hook the end of the charging wire on stud A after routing the charging wire for 41 runs hook it on studs B C and D then lead it through the two washers 1 and turn it 1 2 over the screw 2 to keep it in place 2 Loosen the screws 3 4 5 and 6 then tighten the screw 7 ...

Page 224: ...ssembly and the transfer charging assembly may be adjusted by turing the screw found on the back of the assemblies A single turn of the screw changes the height by about 0 7mm 6 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire Primary Height of the charging wire No height adjusting mechanism Charging assembly Pre transfer Transfer Separation 7 5 0mm 3mm 7 5 0mm 3mm 13 6 0 3mm 15 7 0 2mm 10 0 2mm ...

Page 225: ... Remove the developing assembly See E Developing Assembly 3 Slide out the fixing feeding unit and place the drum protective sheet 4 Remove the inside cover process unit 5 Slide out the primary charging assembly 1 and the pre transfer charging assembly 2 6 Fit the drum stop tool 3 then remove the screw 4 and detach the fixing screw 5 7 Remove the three screws 6 and slide out the process unit 7 1 2 ...

Page 226: ... it Caution When placing the process unit after re moval rotate the kit support plate 1 counterclockwise so as to keep a dis tance from the floor Points to Note When Removing the Photosensitive Drum 1 When you have removed the photo sensitive drum do not rotate the magnet roller of the cleaner unit Doing so could cause leakage of toner 2 When removing the photosensitive drum or mounting it do not ...

Page 227: ... S A CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Figure 6 D705 Figure 6 D708 Figure 6 D707 Figure 6 D706 2 Mounting the Process Unit Mount the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it When placing it on the slide rails however pay attention to the areas indicated in the figures ...

Page 228: ...ON SYSTEM Figure 6 E701 Figure 6 E702 E Developing Assembly 1 Removing the Developing Assembly 1 Open the manual feed tray cover then re move the six mounting screws 1 and de tach the developing assembly stay 2 2 Disconnect the two connectors 3 and slide out the developing assembly 4 to the front 1 2 1 4 3 3 ...

Page 229: ...JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM 2 Removing the Hopper 1 Remove the developing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the hopper 3 Figure 6 E703 Figure 6 E704 3 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 230: ...ng the Blade Unit 1 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and detach the sleeve cover 2 2 Remove the screw 3 and detach the po larity plate 4 then remove the five screws 5 and detach the blade 6 to gether with the mounting plate 7 Caution The blade must be adjusted to an ex tremely high accuracy Do not remove it on its own in the field Detach it to gether with its mounting plate ...

Page 231: ...against the developing assembly and secure it in place with five screws Be sure to put copy paper over the devel oping cylinder for protection before start ing to mount the blade 2 Mount the polarity plate with a screw 5 Removing the Developing Cylinder 1 Remove the developing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the blade unit 3 Remove the three mounting screws 1 from the rear and detach the deceler...

Page 232: ...gure 6 E709 Figure 6 E710 Figure 6 E711 5 Remove the E ring 4 and detach the pressure arm 5 6 Remove the E ring 6 gear 7 pressure roll 8 washer 9 grip ring 10 seal 11 butting roll 12 washer 9 and bearing 13 in the order indicated 7 Remove the E ring 14 and the pressure arm 15 at the front 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 233: ...crews 22 and detach the bushing 23 and then the de veloping sleeve 24 Caution Do not leave fingerprints or oil on the surface of the developing cylinder Wipe off any with lint free paper Do not use solvent Points to Note When Mounting the Developing Cylinder Both front and rear sides of the develop ing assembly and the developing cylin der are equipped with a magnetic seal plate When mounting the ...

Page 234: ...S A 6 75 CHAPTER 6 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM Figure 6 F701 Figure 6 F702 Separation claw Cleaning blade 1 2 F Drum Cleaner Unit Construction 1 Removing the Cleaning Blade 1 Open the front cover 2 Slide out the process unit 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the re ciprocating arm 2 ...

Page 235: ...screws 4 then while pushing it toward the rear detach the cleaning blade together with the mounting plate 5 5 Remove the E ring 6 and detach the pressure plate 7 then detach the clean ing blade assembly 8 6 Remove the five screws 9 and detach the blade retaining plate 10 then detach the cleaning blade 11 Figure 6 F703 Figure 6 F704 Figure 6 F705 4 5 3 6 7 8 10 11 9 ...

Page 236: ...etaining plate 2 Caution When butting the cleaning blade be sure there is not gap 2 Tighten the screws on the blade retaining plate temporarily in the order indicated Caution When tightening the screws temporarily be sure to hold the blade down against the end See Figure 6 F706 3 Tighten the screws on the blade retaining plate fully in the order indicated 4 Apply toner on the cleaning blade where ...

Page 237: ...sure to put the blade auxiliary plate be tween the blade support plate and the blade back plate Caution After mounting the cleaning blade turn the drum if toner slips off the cleaning blade at this time repeat the foregoing steps If the problem is not corrected after tightening the screws replace the clean ing blade Blade support plate Blade auxiliary plate Blade back plate ...

Page 238: ...he process unit 3 Remove the E ring 1 and slide out the separation claw holder shaft 2 to the front to detach the separation holder 3 4 Remove the spring 4 and detach the separation claw 5 Points to Note When Mounting When mounting the separation claw holder be sure that the separation claw holder spring is butted against the drum cleaner case Further check to make sure that the rack of the separa...

Page 239: ...l Feed Tray Pickup Assembly 7 18 III CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH 7 20 A Outline 7 20 B Control System 7 20 C Sequence of Operations registration brake 7 21 IV MAKING DOUBLE SIDED COPIES 7 22 A Control System 7 22 B Sequence of Operations 7 24 C Controlling the Reversal Motor M11 7 25 D Controlling the Duplexing Feeder Motor M12 7 26 E No Stacking Operation 7 27 F Detecting the Horizontal R...

Page 240: ...ssette 3 4 550 sheets 80 g m2 Multifeeder 50 sheets 80 g m2 Center Paper feeding reference Paper stacking capacity Paper deck right left by the service person Cassette 3 4 by the user Multifeeder by the user Paper size switch Turning on and off the cassette selection mechanism Selecting paper icons Related user mode Deck horizontal registration Cassette horizontal registration Manual feed tray hor...

Page 241: ... Right deck feed sensor PS35 Multifeeder feed sensor PS37 Cassette 3 pickup paper sensor PS41 Vertical path 3 sensor PS42 Cassette 4 pickup paper sensor PS46 Vertical path 4 sensor PS47 Vertical path 1 sensor PS49 Vertical path 2 sensor PS10 PS16 PS11 PS12 PS26 PS25 PS49 PS47 PS20 PS35 PS9 PS5 PS27 PS37 PS41 PS42 PS46 PS14 PS15 PS6 PS13 Pre registration roller Vertical path 1 roller Vertical path ...

Page 242: ... clutch drive signal CL17D Lower feeder middle roller clutch drive signal CL16D Post confluence paper detection signal PS15S C2 feeding clutch drive signal CL19 C2 feed detection signal PS26S C2 pickup clutch drive signal CL11D C2 pickup detection signal PS25S C2 pickup solenoid drive signal SL8D C2 lifter detection signal PS31S C2 paper detection signal PS32S Vertical path 1 clutch drive signal C...

Page 243: ...ckup solenoid SL7 Right deck pickup paper sensor PS20 Registration roller paper sensor PS5 Registration roller clutch CL2 Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor PS47 1st sheet picked up Stopped temporarily to create a sheet to sheet distance 2nd sheet picked up COPIER OPTION CST C1 DWSW COPIER OPTION CST C2 DWSW COPIER OPTION CST DK DWSW COPIER OPTION CST C3 DWSW COPIER OPTION CST C4 DWSW When pickup...

Page 244: ...ette 4 Cassette 4 pickup clutch CL14 Pickup motor M2 Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL10 Cassette 4 pickup paper sensor PS42 Vertical path roller 4 sensor PS46 Registration roller paper sensor PS5 Registration roller clutch CL2 Vertical path roller 3 paper sensor PS41 Vertical path roller 2 paper sensor PS49 Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor PS47 Copy Start key ON or print command received 1st sheet...

Page 245: ...ulse generation circuit J622 J621 J513 J1721 DC controller PCB Relay PCB 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 11 12 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 38V 5V 0V 0V GND M2_ON M2_FG Pickup motor M2 When the pickup motor starts to rotate the pulse signal goes 1 When the pulse signals goes 0 error code E015 is indicated When the M2 drive signal goes 1 the pickup motor starts to rotate Item Power supply Drive signal Operating driving assembly C...

Page 246: ...ts Right deck Deck right open closed sensor PS23 Lifter sensor PS21 Deck right paper sensor PS22 Deck right paper level middle sensor PS51 Deck right paper level upper sensor PS52 Deck right limit sensor PS24 Deck right lifter motor M13 Cassette open closed detection Lifter position detection Paper presence absence detection Copy paper level detection Lifter upper limiter Drive motor Left deck Dec...

Page 247: ... Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Feeding roller Separation roller Lifter Paper Deck open closed sensor Lifter position sensor Pickup roller Pickup roller Pickup sensor Lifter position lever Limit sensor Lifter Paper sensor Feeding roller Separation roller Lifter position sensor Cassette open closed sensor Paper Pickup roller Pickup roller Pickup sensor ...

Page 248: ...rive to the lifter motor stops Figure 7 207 Block Diagram of the Limiter Q62 M13 Motor drive circuit CPU Deck right limit sensor PS24 DC controller PCB Q53 M14 Motor drive circuit CPU Deck left limit sensor PS34 DC controller PCB B1 B2 A5 J518 J514 A4 A5 B8 J511 J514 Motor drive signal Motor drive signal When the lift signal is received the motor drive signal is stopped When the limit signal is re...

Page 249: ...ure 7 208 Paper Present Figure 7 209 Paper Absent 4 Detecting the Level of Paper a Outline The copier indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings includ ing No Paper on the control panel Figure 7 210 Table 7 203 Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Copy paper Lifter Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Lifter 100 to about 50 of capacity about 50 to about 10 of capaci...

Page 250: ...er an exclusive sensor is used See 3 Detecting the Presence Absence of Paper Figure 7 211 Construction of the Mechanism Table 7 204 Combinations of Sensor States DC controller PCB Paper level 100 to about 50 Paper level about 50 to about 10 Paper level about 10 or less 1 2 2 2 1 1 Sensor PS32 ON ON ON OFF Sensor PS22 ON ON ON OFF 1 Sensor PS51 ON OFF OFF OFF Paper level 100 to about 50 About 50 to...

Page 251: ...7 212 Construction of the Mechanism Paper level much Paper level little DC controller PCB Variable resistor Variable resistor COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 LVOL COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C3 HVOL COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 LVOL COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ C4 HVOL Reading when 50 sheets exit in the cassette 3 Reading when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 3 Reading when 50 sheets exist in the cassette 4 Reading when ...

Page 252: ... new paper size in service mode 2 Cassette 3 4 1 The length of paper is detected by two photointerrupers each cassette 2 The width of paper is detected by a slide volume Part 2 Chapter 6 2 2 1 2 1 3 Figure 7 213 Table 7 205 COPIER OPTION BODY P SZ C1 COPIER OPTION BODY P SZ C2 6 A4 15 B5 18 LTR Service Mode Cassette deck right Cassette deck left Cassette Deck Settings Paper width detecting VR Pape...

Page 253: ...es which are marked A through M as shown in Table 7 206 Refer to these markings if the user reports skew movement of paper thereby deciding whether the paper width is set correctly Note that this information is not disclosed to the user Table 7 206 Markings and Paper Sizes Remarks U3 U2 U1 U4 Paper size STMT R A5 R B5 R KLGL R GLTR R G LGL A4 R LGL LTR R FLSC B4 B5 G LTR 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 LTR A3...

Page 254: ...slice level Unit mm Group Size SZ 2 A4 288 5 273 7 261 8 238 0 212 9 206 6 196 6 186 0 165 2 144 1 U4 U1 B5 STMT LTRR LGL 279 4 431 8mm 11 17 U2 G LTR K LGL U1 FOOLSCAP OFFICIO E OFFI A LGL A OFFI G LGL FOLIO AUS FLS LTR A LTR U2 U3 U4 A4R U3 A5 G LTRP K LGLR B5R A5R STMTR A3 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 SZ 2 SZ 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 PS102 PS104 PS102 PS104 PS102 PS104 PS102 PS104 PS101 PS103 PS101 PS103 ...

Page 255: ...aper width basic value for STMTR in the cassette 4 Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4R in the cassette 4 COPIER OPTION BODY C1 DWSW COPIER OPTION BODY C2 DWSW COPIER OPTION BODY C3 DWSW COPIER OPTION BODY C4 DWSW Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control mechanism for deck right pickup Use it to switch the fixing assembly temperature control mechanism for deck left ...

Page 256: ...nt LTRR Argentine LGL Government LGL FOLIO Argentine OFFICIO Notation A3 A4R A4 A5 A5R B4 B5R B5 11 17 LTRR LTR STMT STMTR LGL K LGL K LGLR FLSC A FLS OFI E OFI B OFI A LTR A LTRR G LTR G LTRR A LGL G LGL FOLI A OFI Size vertical horizontal mm 297 1 420 1 210 1 297 1 297 1 210 1 210 1 148 5 1 148 5 1 210 1 257 1 364 1 182 1 257 1 257 1 182 1 279 1 432 1 216 1 279 1 279 1 216 1 216 1 139 5 1 139 5 ...

Page 257: ...r PS35 Figure 7 214 DC controller PCB PS17 PS35 Manual feed tray paper detection signal MLT_PAPER_PS J510 B8 Manual feed signal MLT_CURL_ENTRY J510 B2 Manual feed tray feed clutch drive signal CL18D J513 A7 Manual feed tray pickup clutch drive signal CL7D J513 A9 Manual feed tray pickup solenoid drive signal pickup direction CL6P J510 B11 Manual feed tray pickup solenoid Manual feed tray pickup so...

Page 258: ...ear Side guide front Manual feed tray Manual feed tray power width detection signal MLT_WTH_VR J510 B5 COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4R COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A6R COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ MF A4 Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R on the manual feed tray Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A6R on the manual feed tray Use it to adjust the paper width basic value for A4 on th...

Page 259: ...2 Chapter 6 3 3 1 Registration clutch CL2 Registration clutch drive signal CL2D Registration brake clutch CL3 Registration brake clutch drive signal CL3D Shift clutch activation timing service mode B Control System Figure 7 301 M2 CL2 CL3 DC controller PCB Registration drive signal CL2D J509 A5 Registration brake drive signal CL3D J509 B7 Registration roller Pickup motor ...

Page 260: ...od of time to prevent idle rotation otherwise caused by inertia Registration clutch CL2 Registration brake clutch CL3 Pre registration clutch CL5 Pre registration brake clutch CL6 50 msec approx 146 msec approx 146 msec approx ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Note If paper stops for a long time before the registration roller ADF original processing time Finisher delivery processing time COPIER ADJUST F...

Page 261: ...id drive signal SL3D J508 B18 Lower feeder motor PS16 PS12 PS5 Reversal motor M11 PS6 PS10 1 2 3 1 2 3 PS9 SL3 SL11 M12 J519 B5 Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal SL11D J508 A8 J508 A5 J508 A11 Fixing feeding outlet paper detection signal PS11S External delivery detection signal PS10S Reversal paper detection signal PS16S J508 B15 J508 A2 J519 B6 Fixing separation claw paper detection signal ...

Page 262: ...l motor M11 SL11 M12 J519 B5 Pre confluence detection signal PS14S DC controller PCB PS15 Reversing flapper solenoid drive signal SL11D U turn paper detection signal PS13S Post confluence paper detection signal PS15S J519 B7 J519 B8 J519 B9 Duplexing reversal paper detection signal PS12S J519 B6 CL16 M2 Lower feeding middle clutch drive signal CL16D Lower feeding right clutch drive signal CL17D J5...

Page 263: ... motor M 2 Internal paper sensor PS 9 Flapper solenoid SL 3 Duplexing reversal motor M 11 Duplexing feeder motor M 12 Lower feeding middle clutch CL 16 Lower feeding right clutch CL 17 Post confluence paper sensor PS 15 Pre confluence paper sensor PS 14 U turn sensor PS 13 Duplexing reversal paper sensor PS 12 Fixing outlet paper sensor PS 11 Reversal paper sensor PS 1 Reversal guide solenoid SL 1...

Page 264: ...A5 A6 A7 A8 A8 A7 A6 A5 J3602 J519 J3603 DUPI OFF DUPI B DUPI A DC controller PCB No stacking feeding driver PCB CPU IC13 Phase B excitation control signal Phase A excitation control signal When the M11 drive signal goes 1 the pickup motor starts to rotate When the M11 drive signal goes 0 the pickup motor stops Description Supplies 24 V from the no stacking feeder driver PCB Signal DUPI_OFF from t...

Page 265: ...OFF DUPF A DUPF B DC controller PCB No stacking feeding driver PCB Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit 24V CPU IC13 Phase B excitation control signal Phase A excitation control signal When the M12 drive signal goes 1 the pickup motor starts to rotate When the M15 drive signal goes 0 the pickup motor stops Description 24 V is supplied by the no stacking feeding driver PCB Signal D...

Page 266: ...paper after fixing is moved to the holding tray assembly by the deliv ery flapper and the reversing flapper and then is moved to the lower feeding assembly The copier re orders image pages in its memory for printing eliminating the need for printing in the order of the originals as a result its paper feeding operation need not be held at rest too long and consequently double sided copies may be ma...

Page 267: ...e as follows when making one set of double sided copies of 10 originals Figure 7 406 1 1 The 1st sheet is picked up from the deck right 2 The 1st side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up 3 The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly The 3rd sheet is picked up 4 The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly 1 3 1 3 1 ...

Page 268: ... moved to the lower feed ing assembly The 5th side is printed on the 3rd sheet 6 The 1st sheet is re picked up from the lower feeding assembly 7 The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is kept in wait and the 4th sheet is picked up 8 The 7th side is printed on the 4th sheet and the 1st sheet is discharged 3 1 5 3 1 5 5 3 2 1 7 3 5 2 1 ...

Page 269: ...The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet and the 3rd sheet is kept in wait in the lower feeding assembly The 5th sheet is picked up 10 The 2nd sheet is discharged The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet 11 The 6th side is printed on the 3rd sheet 12 The 3rd sheet is discharged 4 3 5 2 1 7 9 5 7 4 3 2 1 6 5 9 7 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 6 7 9 ...

Page 270: ...N U S A 7 31 CHAPTER 7 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM Figure 7 406 4 13 The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet 14 The 4th sheet is discharged and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet 15 The 5th sheet is discharged 8 7 9 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 10 9 6 5 8 7 4 3 2 1 10 9 ...

Page 271: ...onfluence sensor PS15 By the horizontal registration motor M15 By controlling the horizontal registration motor pulses 1 pulse about 0 16 mm COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE E051 The home position cannot be detected within a specific period of time Paper position detection Detection start timing Drive Position measurement Related service mode Related error code Moves through the sensor Copy paper H...

Page 272: ...d over a specific distance about 10 mm past the horizontal registration sensor The position of paper is detected with reference to the start position and by finding out the difference between the start position and the actual paper position from the number of drive pulses 1 pulse about 0 16 mm of the motor Figure 7 408 Horizontal Registration Detection Main power switch ON Duplexing reversal motor...

Page 273: ... A 24V Motor driver IC2 DC controller PCB No stacking feeding driver PCB Interface circuit Interface circuit Interface circuit CPU IC13 When the M15 drive signal goes 1 the pickup motor starts to rotate When the M15 drive signal goes 0 the pickup motor is held in stop state Phase B excitation control signal Phase A excitation control signal Description 24 V is supplied by the no stacking feeding d...

Page 274: ...rsing flapper solenoid Reversing assembly Copying operation Making multiple copies of a single original Making copies on transparencies However the images will be mirror images Other than above Delivery Face up Face down Description Drives the feeding roller Turns on in face up mode to lead paper to the delivery assembly Turns on in reversal delivery mode to speed up the rotation of the external d...

Page 275: ... PCB DC controller PCB MFC PCB Control panel power switch Cassette heater H4 Q2604 Q2603 Z2602 RLY2602 J505 J1722 J1722 24V Heater drier PCB CASETTE_HEAT_ON 3 Heater switch SW3 3 1 Main power switch From power outlet Relay RLY2 Selects either power outlet sync or control panel power switch sync OFF ON Heater switch SW3 When the cassette heater ON signal goes 1 the cassette heater turns on When mak...

Page 277: ...NON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A VII DETECTING JAMS A Outline 1 Arrangement of Jam Sensors Figure 7 701 Arrangement of Sensors PS6 PS10 PS16 PS11 PS12 PS26 PS25 PS49 PS47 PS20 PS35 PS9 PS5 PS27 PS37 PS41 PS42 PS46 PS14 PS15 PS13 ...

Page 278: ... Types of Jams Table 7 701 Types of Jams Right deck pickup sensor Left deck pickup sensor Cassette 3 pickup sensor Cassette 4 pickup sensor Right deck feed sensor Left deck feed sensor Manual feed sensor Vertical path 1 sensor Vertical path 2 sensor Vertical path 3 sensor Vertical path 4 sensor Registration roll sensor Claw jam sensor Internal delivery sensor External delivery sensor Reversal sens...

Page 279: ... PRINT set INTR PRINT Pickup clutch LC10 11 12 13 Pickup solenoid SL7 8 9 10 Jam check Pickup sensor PS20 25 37 42 I 0 13 sec I 0 13 sec Normal Error A specific time I after the pickup clutch turns on a jam check starts A check is made for about 0 13 to find out if paper has reached the pickup sensor if paper is absent a pickup delay jam is identified Right deck Left deck Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Man...

Page 280: ...delay jams Figure 7 703 Detecting Other Delay Jams Copy Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Sensor N 1 Jam check Sensor N 0 13 sec I 0 13 sec I Normal Error A specific time I after the leading edge of paper is detected by the sensor N 1 a jam check is started A check is made for about 0 13 sec to find out if paper has reached the sensor N A delay jam is identified if paper does not reach the sens...

Page 281: ...urn sensor PS13 Pre confluence sensor PS14 Post confluence sensor PS15 Post confluence sensor PS15 Sensor N 1 Right deck pickup sensor PS20 Left deck pickup sensor PS25 Vertical path 2 sensor PS49 Left deck feed sensor PS26 Post confluence sensor PS15 Vertical path 3 sensor PS41 Vertical path 4 sensor PS46 Cassette 3 pickups sensor PS37 Cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42 Pre registration sensor PS47 Ma...

Page 282: ... stationary jam at power on is identified in relation to the presence absence of paper over a specific sensor about 1 sec after the control panel power switch is turned on Copy Start key ON or PRINT set INTR PRINT Jam check Sensor N L 40mm Normal Error L 40mm L paper length If paper is detected here a stationary jam is identified A jam check is started after feeding paper length 40 mm upon detecti...

Page 283: ... the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical ...

Page 284: ... Figure 7 A801 Figure 7 A802 A Manual Tray Assembly 1 Removing the Manual Tray Unit 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the delivery tray unit 2 2 Remove the four screws 3 and detach the upper right cover 5 while the toner cartridge cover 4 is open 3 Remove the screw 6 and disconnect the connector 7 then detach the manual feed tray unit 8 1 2 ...

Page 285: ...ng time pickup can fail If such happens detach the protective sheet from the sponge roller and dry wipe the sponge roller 3 Mounting the Pickup Roller Mount the pickup roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind The front pickup roller and the rear pickup roller are not interchangeable The front pickup roller is identified by its sil ver colored collar When mounting ...

Page 286: ...kup roller and remove the stop ring 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the manual feed tray guide 2 3 Remove the stop ring 3 from the front of the feeding roller assembly and move the feeding roller assembly 5 together with the timing belt 4 to detach 5 Orientation of the Feeding Roller When mounting the feeding roller 6 to the manual feed tray pickup assembly be sure that the belt pulley 7 and ...

Page 287: ...the urethane sponge of the part is pink and changes over time acceler ated if exposed to light Its tone will change from pink to orange and to yellow it is a general characteris tic of urethane sponge and no physical deterioration in performance exists be cause of changes in color and the part is not identified by color 7 Adjusting the Tension of the Separation Roller If double feeding or pickup f...

Page 288: ...5 6 Figure 7 A813 Figure 7 A814 Figure 7 A815 8 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor 1 Remove the mounting screw 1 and de tach the solenoid cover 2 2 Remove the mounting screw 3 and de tach the solenoid 4 together with the up per plate 3 Remove the screw 5 and detach the con nector cover 6 then disconnect the con nector 7 ...

Page 289: ...INTED IN U S A 8 9 8 8 8 8 10 11 10 12 13 12 Figure 7 A816 Figure 7 817 Figure 7 A818 4 Remove the ten mounting screws 8 and detach the manual feed tray pickup assem bly 9 5 Remove the two mounting screws 10 and detach the lower cover 11 6 Remove the two mounting screws 12 and detach the guide plate 13 ...

Page 290: ...lide volume B Figure 7 A819 Figure 7 A820 7 Remove the two mounting screws 14 and remove the sensor mount 15 8 Detach the sensor from the sensor mount 9 Routing the Manual Feed Tray Assembly Side Guide Timing Belt Butt the rack plate of the manual feed tray against section A open condition Move the slide volume in the direction of B and attach the timing belt to the pulley ...

Page 291: ... 10 Position of the Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Manual Feed Tray Slide the solenoid into the direction of A so that the gap between the shutter 1 and the shutter plate 2 is 0 4 0 2 mm when the sole noid is pulled 11 Removing the Manual Feed Roller 1 Open the manual feed tray door 2 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the front fixing plate 2 of the manual feed roller assembly 1 ...

Page 292: ...53 CHAPTER 7 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 5 4 6 8 7 10 9 Figure 7 A824 Figure 7 A825 3 Remove the screw 5 and detach the rear fixing plate 1 4 then detach the rear fix ing plate 2 6 4 Remove the E ring 7 spacer 8 and bearing 9 at both front and rear then de tach the manual feed roller 10 ...

Page 293: ... the manual feed roller assembly to the copier 2 Mount the rear fixing plate 2 and the rear fixing plate 1 in the order indicated then secure them in place with the mounting screw 3 Caution When mounting the manual feed roller hook the two claws of the rear fixing plate 2 on the three holes in the rear side plate then mount the rear fixing plate 1 to secure 3 Secure the front fixing plate 4 with t...

Page 294: ...Removing the Front Deck right 1 Slide out the deck 2 Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover Caution The pickup assembly cannot be removed unless the deck has been removed the lifter will get trapped 3 Remove the mounting screw 1 and de tach the connector cover 2 then discon nect the connector 3 4 Remove the three mounting screws 4 and detach the pickup assembly 5 ...

Page 295: ...R 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 1 2 3 Figure 7 B802 Figure 7 B803 2 Removing the Pickup Assembly of the Front Deck left 1 Slide out the deck right left 2 Remove the two stoppers 2 from both left and right of the deck left 1 3 Disconnect the connector 3 from inside the copier ...

Page 296: ...m bly 6 Caution When removing the fixing plate be sure to support the pickup assembly to avoid dropping it 3 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly Same as removing the deck right pickup assembly 4 Removing the Cassette 4 Pickup Assembly Same as removing the deck right pickup assembly 5 Removing the Pickup Roller 1 Remove the pickup assembly from the copier 2 Remove the two stop rings 1 on the ou...

Page 297: ...s used to remove it with the following in mind The front pickup roller and the rear pickup roller are not interchangeable The collar of the front pickup roller is gold in color When mounting the pickup roller 1 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round marking 2 on the side of the roller and the round marking 3 on the collar gold are to ward the copier s front The collar of the rear pickup rol...

Page 298: ...e pickup roller 5 at the font then detach the feed ing roller 7 together with the timing belt 6 7 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck Cassette Pickup Assembly When mounting the feeding roller assem bly 1 to the deck cassette pickup assembly be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the copier s front When mounting the feeding roller 3 to the feeding roller shaft 4 be sure that the round m...

Page 299: ...int If for the pickup assembly of the front deck left remove one screw 3 Detach the separation roller 6 from the separation roller shaft mount Caution Initially the urethane sponge of the part is pink and changes over time acceler ated if exposed to light Its tone will change from pink to orange and to yellow it is a general characteris tic of urethane sponge and no physical deterioration in perfo...

Page 300: ...oller If double feeding or pickup failure occurs adjust the position of the pressure spring used for the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of B If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction of A 10 Orientation of the Separation Roller Keep the following in mind when replac ing the separation roller Caution If mounted in the wrong orientation in...

Page 301: ...iewed from A 36 0 5mm 3 Figure 7 B816 11 Position of the Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid of the Cassette 3 4 As shown in Figure 7 B816 adjust the po sition of the solenoid by using the two screws 3 so that the distance from the bottom of the pickup assembly and section A of the roller arm is 36 0 5 mm when 1 and 2 are oper ated ...

Page 302: ...818 Figure 7 B819 12 Adjusting the Registration of the Front Deck right left 1 Loosen the four screws 2 on the deck front cover 1 and the two fixing screws 3 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjust ments 13 Adjusting the Registration of the Cassette 3 4 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the cassette front cover 2 ...

Page 303: ... 4 After adjustment be sure to execute COPIER FUNCTION CST C3 STMTR AR or C4 STMTR A4R in service mode 14 Removing the Lifter Motor M16 M17 of the Cassette 3 4 1 Slide out the front deck right then slide out the cassette 3 4 2 Remove the front lower right cover of the cassette assembly as instructed under C 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 3 Remove the two fixing screws 1 of the lifter motor ...

Page 304: ...e guide plate 1 of the vertical path roller 2 as instructed under C 2 Re moving the Vertical Path Roller 2 In the case of the lifter motor M17 re move the cassette 3 pickup assembly 2 us ing the same instructions as in B 1 Re moving the front deck right Pickup As sembly 2 Move the lifter motor M16 M17 3 to the right and fix it with the screw 4 in place temporarily 1 2 3 4 4 Figure 7 B822 Figure 7 ...

Page 305: ...leasing button 7 is pushed halfway Caution The releasing button is pushed half way so that The separation roller moves down The cassette is just about to slide out 5 If the lifter drive gear is not fully away from the lifter motor gear move the lifter motor M16 M17 7 to the left and push the releasing button halfway once again to make a check 6 Secure the lifter motor M16 M17 fully with two screws...

Page 306: ...sembly 1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1 3 4 1 Remove the deck right cassette pickup assembly 2 Remove the E ring 1 and the bearing 2 at the front then remove the grip ring 3 clutch 4 and bearing 5 at the rear 3 Remove the E ring 6 at the front and the rear of the roller shaft then move the bearing 7 on both sides to the center and detach the guide plate 8 Remove the vertical path roller 9 ...

Page 307: ...IN U S A 2 1 1 1 1 5 3 4 Figure 7 C803 Figure 7 C804 2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 1 Remove the deck right and slide out the cassette 3 4 2 Remove the four screws 1 and detach the cassette mount front lower right cover 2 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and remove the screw 4 then detach the guide plate 5 ...

Page 308: ...geRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 7 69 CHAPTER 7 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 6 7 8 Figure 7 C805 4 Remove the E ring 6 at the front of the roller shaft then move the bearing 7 to the center and detach the vertical path roller 2 8 ...

Page 309: ...the Registration Clutch Registration Brake Clutch 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the grip ring 2 then detach the registra tion clutch 3 2 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch 1 Remove the transfer separation charging assembly front cover 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the grip ring 2 then detach the registra tion brake clutch ...

Page 310: ... Removing the Registration Roller 1 Remove the front cover of the fixing feed ing unit 2 Remove the transfer separation charging assembly 3 Remove the registration brake clutch 4 Remove the E ring 1 and detach the clutch drive gear 2 Caution When removing the drive gear take care not to drop the pin 5 Remove the spring 3 E ring 4 and bushing 5 at the front ...

Page 311: ... 7 D805 Figure 7 D806 6 Remove the registration clutch 7 Remove the spring 6 E ring 7 spacer 8 and bushing 9 at the rear then de tach the registration roller 10 4 Removing the Pre Registration Roller 1 Open the middle right cover and remove the screw 1 detach the connector cover 2 and remove the two screws 3 then detach the rear fixing plate 4 ...

Page 312: ...gure 7 D807 Figure 7 D808 2 Remove the screw 5 and detach the front fixing plate 6 then detach the pre registration roller assembly 7 3 Remove the two springs 8 E ring 9 and arm support shaft 10 at the front 4 Remove the E ring 11 spacer 12 and bearing 13 5 Perform steps 3 and 4 for the rear then detach the pre registration roller assem bly ...

Page 313: ...1 Figure 7 E802 E Feeding Assembly 1 Removing the Feeding Belt 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Remove the fixing feeding unit front cover 3 Disconnect the three connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the harness guide 3 4 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the fixing feeding unit releasing lever sup port plate 5 ...

Page 314: ...ING SYSTEM 8 6 7 11 12 9 14 13 10 17 15 16 16 Figure 7 E803 Figure 7 E804 Figure 7 E805 5 Remove the E ring 6 bearing 7 and three screws 8 6 Remove the E ring 9 gear 10 pin 11 three screws 12 E ring 13 and bearing 14 7 Remove the feeding belt unit 15 and de tach the feeding belt 16 and the postcard belt 17 ...

Page 315: ...ER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 1 Figure 7 E806 2 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing lever Sensor 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Detach the fixing feeding unit front cover 3 Release the claw of the fixing feeding unit releasing lever sensor 1 ...

Page 316: ...nit 1 Slide out the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Holding the left and right grips of the duplexing unit detach it from the copier Caution Take care not to trap your hand between the grip and the rail Do not place the duplexing unit where it is subjected to damage 2 Removing the Front Cover of the Duplexing Unit 1 Remove the four screws 1 and the three knobs 2 then detach the front cover 3 Figu...

Page 317: ...ersing Flapper Solenoid 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the re versing flapper solenoid 3 4 Removing the Reversal Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplexing unit 2 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then detach the reversal motor together with the motor support plate 3 ...

Page 318: ...and detach the reversal motor 5 5 Removing the Lower Feeder Motor 1 Remove the front cover of the duplexing unit 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two screws 2 then detach the lower feeder motor 3 6 Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the upper cover 2 Figure 7 F806 Figure 7 F807 ...

Page 319: ...ct the connector 3 and remove the screw 4 then detach the horizontal registration motor 5 7 Removing the Deck left Draw Out Clutch Lower Feeder Middle Clutch 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the front cover 3 Remove the two set screws 2 to detach the locking ring 1 then disconnect the connector 3 and detach the clutch 4 Be sure to perform this for each pair ...

Page 320: ... 1 3 2 4 5 6 Figure 7 F810 Figure 7 F811 8 Removing the Lower Feeding Right Clutch 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the front cover 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the two screws 2 then detach the latch plate 3 4 Remove the bearing 4 and spacer 5 then detach the lower feeding right clutch 6 ...

Page 321: ...l Sensor 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the front cover 3 Remove the motor support plate 4 Remove the following from the front side of the reversing roller shaft 1 E ring 2 Gear 3 and parallel pin 4 E ring 5 Spacer 6 Bearing 7 5 Remove the following from the rear of the reversing roller shaft 1 E ring 8 Spacer 9 Bearing 10 Figure 7 F812 Figure 7 F813 ...

Page 322: ...JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 7 83 CHAPTER 7 PICK UP FEEDING SYSTEM 11 front 11 rear 12 Figure 7 F814 Figure 7 F815 Figure 7 F816 6 Release the front and rear springs 11 of the reversing guide 7 While lifting the reversing guide detach the reversing roller 12 ...

Page 323: ...geRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 15 14 14 13 16 17 16 Figure 7 F817 Figure 7 F818 8 Disconnect the two connectors 13 and remove the four screws 14 then detach the reversing guide assembly 15 9 Remove the two screws 16 and detach the duplexing reversal sensor 17 ...

Page 324: ...gure 7 F820 10 Removing the U Turn Sensor 1 Perform steps 1 through 8 given for the removal of the duplexing reversal sensor 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the U turn sensor 2 11 Removing the Pre Confluence Sensor 1 Disconnect the connector 1 from the bottom of the duplexing unit then re move the screw 2 and detach the pre confluence sensor 3 ...

Page 325: ...INTED IN U S A 1 1 2 3 5 4 Figure 7 F821 Figure 7 F822 12 Removing the Post Confluence Sensor 1 Remove the two screws 1 from the bot tom of the duplexing unit then detach the left deck feeding roller assembly 2 2 Disconnect the connector 3 then re move the screw 4 and detach the post confluence sensor 5 ...

Page 326: ...3 Removing the Front Deck lifter Draw Out Sensor 1 Disconnect the connector 1 from the bottom of the duplexing unit then re move the screw 2 and detach the front deck left feed sensor 3 14 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 Remove the duplexing unit from the copier 2 Remove the front cover 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the three screws 2 ...

Page 327: ...gure 7 F826 4 Remove the screw 3 and detach the duplexing unit right fixing assembly 4 then remove the two screws 5 at the rear and detach the right grip plate 6 Caution When mounting the right grip plate be sure that the boss on the grip plate is in the hole of the side plate 5 Remove the screw 7 and detach the horizontal registration sensor 8 ...

Page 328: ...6 C Controlling the Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism 8 8 D Controlling the Fixing Inlet Guide Drive Mechanism 8 9 E Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism 8 10 F Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism 8 11 III CONTROLLING THE FIXING TEMPERATURE 8 12 A Outline 8 12 B Down Sequence Control 8 13 C Controlling Temperature by Mode 8 14 D Error Detection 8 18 IV CONTROLLI...

Page 329: ...00 C during STBY Item Fixing method Temperature detection Control temperature Fixing heater Others Error detection Cleaning method Control 1 Main Thermistor for temperature control error detection 2 Sub Thermistor for error detection 3 Thermal Switch for error detection 1 Down sequence control 2 Temperature control by mode Transparency mode Thick paper mode 1 Temperature control error detection by...

Page 330: ...w the major components of the fixing system Figure 8 101 Cross Section Figure 8 102 External View Cleaning belt unit Upper fixing roller Separation claw Lower fixing roller Cleaning belt Main thermistor TH1 Sub thermistor TH2 Thermal switch TP1 Inlet guide Upper fixing roller Sub thermistor TH2 Main thermistor TH1 Thermal switch TP1 ...

Page 331: ...50 mm dia Temperature control error detection Error detection Designed for an operating temperature of 223 C Designed for a reciprocating distance of 3 mm Designed for up down movement of 1 8 mm Pressure roller 38 mm dia DC motor 22 W Used mainly for temperature control during PRINT 850 W for 20A model 760 W for 15A model Used mainly for temperature control during STBY 365 W for 20A model 400 W fo...

Page 332: ...tions Wait indicator RED RED GREEN Fixing motor Main heater Sub heater SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 195 C 210 C 205 C 200 C 195 C 200 C Copy Start key ON Controlled to 200 C Controlled to 200 C The temperature drops because of passage of paper Both main and sub heaters are turned on to return to 200 C in a short time ...

Page 333: ...ing mechanism 5 Drive of the upper separation claw reciprocating mechanism Figure 8 201 Construction of the Control System M3 M1 SL1 SL2 DC controller PCB J508B Drive signal Detection signal Detection signal Drive signal Drive signal J508A Inlet guide drive solenoid Fixing roller motor Thermistor Upper separation claw Main motor Cleaning belt drive solenoid PS7 Web absent sensor PS8 Web absent war...

Page 334: ... 8 202 shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing roller drive mechanism Figure 8 202 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB J508A 15 1 16 17 18 19 20 FXM LCK 0V 0V 0V 5V FXM ON 14 M3 Upper fixing roller Fixing drive motor When the rotation speed of the fixing motor reaches a specific value 0 When 1 the motor turns on ...

Page 335: ... CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 8 7 CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Related Error Code FXM LCK is 1 for more than 2 sec while the motor is rotating i e FXM ON 1 E014 fixing motor speed error ...

Page 336: ...roller PCB 1 2 3 4 5 6 20 0V 5V WEB WARN 5V WEB LESS 0V J508B To PS7 To PS8 Length detection 2 Length Detection 1 When the cleaning belt length detecting flag comes into contact with the cut off 300 mm from the end of the cleaning belt the cleaning belt length warning sensor PS8 detects the flag causing the message Web Running Out on the control panel Copying may continue If copying continues afte...

Page 337: ...f the control system used to control the fixing inlet guide drive mechanism Figure 8 204 Construction of the Control System Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 DC controller PCB J508B 24V FIXG DWN FIXG UP front Inlet guide rear Upper fixing roller 1 20 11 12 13 Top bottom width 1 8 mm When 0 the fixing inlet guide moves down paper length less than 300 mm When 0 the fixing inlet guide moves up paper le...

Page 338: ...rmistor Reciprocating Mechanism Part 2 Chapter 7 5 3 Figure 8 205 shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the thermistor Figure 8 205 Construction of the Control System Main thermistor Cam One way clutch Cleaning belt drive belt solenoid SL2 front rear Upper fixing roller Reciprocating width 12 mm ...

Page 339: ... Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism Part 2 Chapter 7 5 4 Figure 8 206 shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the uppes separation claw Figure 8 206 Construction of the Control System M1 rear front Cam Upper separation claw unit One way clutches Main motor Eccentric cams Reciprocating width 3 mm ...

Page 340: ...nstruction of the Control System DC controller PCB J508B 1 7 8 10 20 S TEMP 0V 0V M TEMP When 1 the main heater turns on Upper fixing roller Main heater Sub thermistor Main thermistor Thermal switch 9 J505A 1 1 1 11 10 0V 24V MHDTC SHDTC SH ON MH ON 9 14 RLY Relay Front door SSR When the sub heater is powered 0 12 13 Sub heater When 223 C the AC line is turned off Voltage to suit the temperature d...

Page 341: ...o 50 cpm At 170 C dropped to 40 cpm At 165 C printing stopped At 200 C printing is resumed automatically The sub heater is also turned on to recover temperature Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION BODY FIX TMP1 down sequence state temperature Set a relatively high temperature for users who prefer priority on image quality and a relatively low temperature for users who prefer priority on productivit...

Page 342: ...trolled according to purpose for the following operating modes Transparency mode Thick paper mode Power save mode Correction Lowers the control temperature Increases the down sequence rush temperature Lowers the control temperature for STBY Purpose To prevent wrapping of transparencies To prevent drops in the surface temperature of the fixing roller To reduce the power consumption Table 8 301 ...

Page 343: ...ansparency mode selected Copy Start key ON 195 C 210 C 205 C 200 C 195 C Controlled to 200 C Controlled to 200 C Controlled to 195 C Temperature for transparencies Idle rotation is continued until the surface temperature of the fixing roller drops to transparency mode temperature Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION BODY OHP TEMP transparency mode temperature setting 0 disables transparency mode tem...

Page 344: ...PIER OPTION BODY FIX TEMP thick paper mode down sequence start temperature COPIER OPTION BODY CPMKP SW thick paper mode down sequence on off 0 disables down sequence of thick paper mode default 1 enables down sequence for thick paper mode COPIER OPTION CST selecting pickup source for thick paper control sequence C1 front deck right C2 front deck left DK side paper deck C3 cassette 3 C4 cassette 4 ...

Page 345: ...o reduce power consumption Figure 8 304 Sequence of Operations Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Saving by 10 Saving by 25 Saving by 50 200 C 195 C 180 C 155 C 110 C STBY SLEEP STBY WMUP Power save mode selected in user mode Save Power key ON Save Power key OFF 195 C 200 C Controlled to 200 C WMUPR omitted The Save Power key is turned off returning to normal temperature Controlled to 200 C Temperature ...

Page 346: ...ror by the thermal switch TP1 Figure 8 305 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB J508B 1 7 8 10 20 S TEMP 0V 0V M TEMP Upper fixing roller Main heater Sub thermistor Main thermistor Thermal switch 9 J505A 11 10 0V 24V MHDTC SHDTC SH ON 14 J512A 1 14 13 24V SW OFF RLY Relay Front door SSR Main switch 12 13 Sub heater MH ON 9 1 Voltage suited to the temperature detected by the main th...

Page 347: ...ction Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 Main thermistor detection temperature 70 C 3 5 min SLEEP WMUP Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Main power switch OFF 1 E000 3 sec If the temperature detected by the main thermistor does not increase to 70 C or higher within 3 5 min after the control panel power switch has been turned on ...

Page 348: ...igure 8 307 Sequence of Operations error detection Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 230 C 195 C 2 sec 3 sec SLEEP WMUP WMUPR STBY Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 195 C Main power switch OFF 1 E001 If the main thermistor or the sub thermistor has detected 230 C or higher for 2 sec ...

Page 349: ...ror detection Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 150 C 100 C 2 5 min 3 sec SLEEP WMUP Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Main power switch OFF 1 E002 1 The main thermistor does not detect 100 C within 2 5 min after it has detected 70 C 2 The main thermistor does not detect 150 C within 2 5 min after it has detected 70 C ...

Page 350: ...IN U S A Figure 8 309 Sequence of Operations error detection Fixing motor M3 Main heater H1 Sub heater H2 100 C 70 C 2 sec 3 sec SLEEP WMUP Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON Main power switch OFF 1 E003 If the main thermistor detects 70 C for 2 sec or more after it has detected 100 C ...

Page 351: ...TED IN U S A 8 23 CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Figure 8 310 Sequence of Operations error detection Fixing motor H3 Main heater H1 Sub heater 200 C 50 C STBY PRINT Copy Start key 2 E001 If the difference of readings between main thermistor and sub thermistor is 50 C or more ...

Page 352: ...voltage Figure 8 401 shows the construction of the control system used to control the fixing roller bias Figure 8 401 Construction of the Control System DC controller PCB J510A DC 600V J723 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0 V 24 VH 24 VH HVDC EN FGD ON High voltage DC PCB GND GND 1 2 3 4 Relay PCB J733 1 2 When 1 high voltage output is ready When 1 the...

Page 353: ...arts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electrical contin...

Page 354: ...hing on the stopper 2 on both ends of the fixing feeding unit rail 1 slide the fixing feeding unit farther out 3 While pushing the releasing lever link 3 found at the rear of the fixing feeding unit shift up the fixing feeding unit releasing lever 4 and remove the screw 5 to de tach Caution When setting the fixing feeding unit in the copier be sure to mount the releasing lever and shift the lever ...

Page 355: ... 8 A503 Figure 8 A504 4 Remove the two screws 6 pre transfer charging assembly cover 7 and fixing roller knob 8 then remove the two screws 9 and detach the fixing feeding unit cover 10 5 Disconnect the four connectors 11 and remove the three screws 12 then detach the fixing motor 13 7 6 6 10 9 9 8 12 11 13 12 12 11 ...

Page 356: ... REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM Figure 8 A505 6 Open the fixing delivery assembly and remove the screw 14 then holding the front 16 and the rear 17 of the fixing assembly 15 detach the fixing assembly from the copier 14 17 16 15 ...

Page 357: ... the fixing feeding unit halfway out then release the stoppers on both rails and slide the unit farther out 2 Remove the pre transfer charging assem bly cover fixing feeding unit releasing le ver and fixing roller knob 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fix ing assembly upper cover 2 4 Remove the two screws 3 used to secure the fixing cleaning belt assembly and open the top of the fixing cleaning...

Page 358: ...M Figure 8 B504 5 While pushing the cleaning belt feeding roller 4 and the take up roller 5 toward the rear detach the cleaning belt 6 Caution When cleaning the silicone oil pan be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan 7 found under the clean ing belt feeding roller 5 6 4 Figure 8 B503 7 ...

Page 359: ...t it so that the arm guide plate 3 at the front is on the out side of the take up roller At this time check to make sure that the area of contact with the roller is impreg nated with oil Caution Check the fixing cleaning belt for skew wrapping and wrinkling Further be sure that the winding direction and the mounting orientation are as indicated 2 After mounting the fixing cleaning belt move the pl...

Page 360: ... 8 C501 Figure 8 C502 C Fixing Heater and Control Parts 1 Removing the Main Sub Heater 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the rear terminal cover 2 then pull out the two fastons 3 3 Remove the two screws 4 and detach the heater positioning plate rear 5 3 3 1 1 2 4 4 5 ...

Page 361: ...e main sub heater 2 Mounting the Main Sub Heater Mount the fixing heaters by reversing the steps used to remove with the following in mind a Do not touch the surface of the heater b Mount both heaters so that the side with the longer harness from the terminal is at the front c Viewing from the front of the fixing as sembly mount the main heater 1 on the right and the sub heater 2 on the left Figur...

Page 362: ...ermal Switch 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Detach the fixing cleaning belt then re move the two screws 1 oil pan 2 and fixing harness cover 3 3 Remove the faston 4 then remove the two screws 5 and detach the electrode assembly 6 and the thermal switch holder 7 4 Remove the four screws 8 and detach the thermal switch assembly 9 1 1 3 2 6 5 5 7 4 8 8 9 ...

Page 363: ...h 11 4 Removing the Main Thermistor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Detach the fixing cleaning belt and re move the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Disconnect the connector 1 of the ther mistor then remove the screw 2 and detach the thermistor assembly 3 by shifting it to the rear Caution When shifting the thermistor assembly to the rear take care not to damage the fixin...

Page 364: ...ings 4 and remove the main ther mistor 5 5 Removing the Sub Thermistor 1 Slide the fixing assembly out of the copier 2 Remove the fixing cleaning belt and the oil pan 3 Remove the fixing harness cover 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw 2 then remove the sub ther mistor assembly 3 5 Remove the screw 4 and remove the sub thermistor 5 4 4 5 3 2 1 4 5 Figure 8 C512 ...

Page 365: ...oller Assembly 1 Removing the Upper Fixing Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Detach the cleaning belt and clean the oil pan 3 Remove the two fixing heaters 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the locking support plate 2 at the front 5 Remove the screw 3 and detach the locking support plate 4 at the rear 6 Open the upper fixing unit 5 2 1 3 4 5 ...

Page 366: ...NER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 8 FIXING SYSTEM 7 Remove the stopper 6 from the front and the rear 8 While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor remove the up per roller assembly Figure 8 D505 Figure 8 D504 6 6 ...

Page 367: ... 10 Remove the C ring 13 at the rear then remove the electrode plate 14 spacer 15 bearing 16 and bushing 17 2 Mounting the Upper Fixing Roller Mount the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it Caution a Remove it while taking care not to soil or scratch the roller surface then keep the roller in paper b Mount it so that the long cut off A shown in Figure 8 D508 is toward the rear c W...

Page 368: ...etach the oil pan 3 Open the upper fixing unit 4 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the lower separation claw support plate 2 5 Remove the lower roller 3 from the fix ing assembly and remove the E rings 4 and the bearings 5 from both front and rear 4 Adjusting the Nip a Measuring the Nip Be sure to wait 15 min or more after the copier finishes warm up then make 20 A4 copies and perform the followi...

Page 369: ...UNCTION FIXING NIP CHK in service mode to discharge paper b Standards 1 Measure the area shown in Figure 8 D512 Note a and c are points 10 mm from both ends of paper 2 Check to see if the measurements are as indicated in Table 8 D501 otherwise perform c Making Adjustments c Making Adjustments 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Detach the fixing cleaning belt then clean and remove the o...

Page 370: ...m the copier 2 Release the spring 1 used to open the fixing delivery assembly then detach the upper separation claw 2 2 Removing the Lower Separation Claw 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the two screws and detach the lower separation claw assembly together with the support plate 3 Remove the spring 1 from the lower separation claw 4 Remove the three screws 2 and detach the lo...

Page 371: ...ernal Delivery Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the delivery roller guide 2 3 Remove the E ring 3 at the front and slide the bearing 4 toward the gear 4 Remove the E ring 5 at the rear and slide the bearing 6 to the rear then de tach the external delivery roller assembly 7 Figure 8 F502 Figure 8 F503 5 6 7 4 3 ...

Page 372: ... E ring 8 one way gear 9 and bearing 10 then remove the two E rings 11 and detach the two rollers 12 Caution Each roller is equipped with a parallel pin Take care not to lose it 2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Remove the spring 2 three E rings 3 and bushing 4 at the front then detach the drive gear 5 1 4 2 3 3 5 ...

Page 373: ...r nal delivery roller 1 3 Removing the Delivery Speed Switch Clutch 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Remove the fixing motor 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fixing front support plate 2 4 Disconnect the two connectors 3 then remove the two screws 4 and detach the delivery speed switching clutch 5 Figure 8 F506 Figure 8 F507 Figure 8 F508 6 7 1 2 1 1 5 4 3 4 ...

Page 374: ...the lower separation claw assembly 3 Detach the claw jam sensor 1 from the right side of the lower delivery assembly 2 Removing the External Delivery Roller 1 Remove the external delivery roller 2 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the external delivery sensor assembly 2 3 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor 1 Slide out the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Open the upper delivery assembly then ...

Page 375: ...sor 1 Remove the fixing assembly from the copier 2 Open the upper delivery assembly then remove the screw 1 and detach the re versal sensor 2 5 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Outlet Sensor 1 Remove the screw 1 from the bottom of the fixing feeding unit and detach the fix ing feeding outlet sensor 2 Figure 8 G504 Figure 8 G505 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 376: ...t Functions and Error Codes 9 6 B Sequence of Operations 9 8 V POWER SUPPLY 9 10 A Outline of the Power Supply 9 10 B Turning On the Power 9 12 C Rated Outputs of the DC Power Supply PCB 9 16 D Protective Functions 9 17 E Backup Battery 9 18 VI OTHERS 9 21 A Sleep Mode 9 21 B Low Power mode 9 23 C Silence Mode 9 24 D Power Save Mode 9 24 VII DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY 9 25 A External Covers 9 26 B Contr...

Page 377: ...eys and LEDs Control panel power switch PCB LCD contrast adjustment PCB Control panel CPU PCB CPU CPU Control panel Monitoring key inputs keypad function keys Controlling buzzer sound Turning on off control panel LEDs Controls data communication Supplies data display data Adjusts the LCD contrast Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LCD CHK COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LED CHK COPIER FUNCTION PANEL...

Page 378: ...Use the switch behind the copier s inside cover to change between downloading and uploading For details of work see VII Upgrading in Chapter 13 Figure 9 201 Connectors and Switches Table 9 202 Operation and Switch Position LOAD COPY Switch for downloading PCB MFC PCB Image processor PCB Element Flash ROM Backup RAM Flash ROM Backup RAM Downloading Yes Yes Yes Yes Uploading No Yes No Yes Switch pos...

Page 380: ...s equipped with counters for counting sheets according to the type of output See Figures 9 301 and 302 for the arrangement of counters and sensors associated with these counters explanations on how the counters operate by country follow Figure 9 301 Locations of Counters Figure 9 302 Arrangement of Sensors 5 4 1 2 3 PI6 PS10 S3 PS14 Finisher Copier ...

Page 381: ...mage PS10 Double Sided Image 1st side PS14 2nd side PS10 F13 5611 F13 5614 F13 5631 F13 5691 F13 5651 F13 5671 F13 5661 F13 5661 F13 5641 F13 5601 Ref 1 2 3 4 Counter Copier Printer Remote Diagnostic Device II 100 120 UL V areas only Copy Data Controller A1 Count Increments the count per copier output Increments per printer output Copier Increments per large size output The count is incremented fo...

Page 382: ...otor cooling fan Functions Prevents soiling of the wire in the primary charging assembly Discharges heat from around the fixing assembly Cools the scanner Cools the copyboard glass in stream reading Cools the laser driver PCB Cools copy paper Draws copy paper to the feeding belt Draws and removes ozone from around the drum and stray toner Cools the control panel inverter assembly Discharges ozone ...

Page 383: ... 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 9 7 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS The fans are arranged as shown in Figure 9 401 the arrows show the direction of air current Figure 9 401 Arrangement of the Fans FM4 FM5 FM10 FM12 FM2 FM11 FM8 FM9 FM13 FM6 FM7 FM1 FM14 FM3 ...

Page 384: ... switched by the voltage switching circuit of each fan by switching voltage levels Some fans are controlled according to the state of the printer while some are controlled by the state of the scanning lamp Figure 9 402 2 Speed Control Block Diagram Voltage switching circuit CPU DC controller PCB Fan 24V or 12 18V Clock signal Full speed signal Half speed signal 24V 12 18V In the case of FM2 the vo...

Page 385: ... yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyyyyy yyyy yyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyyy yyyyyyy...

Page 386: ...line of the Power Supply The copier s DC power is supplied by the DC power supply PCB and the relay PCB Table 9 501 Major Functions PCB DC power supply PCB Relay PCB Function Generates DC power from AC power Protects against overcurrent Generates DC power from DC power 24V 18V Distributes DC power to loads Protects each load against overcurrent ...

Page 387: ... input 3 3V 5V 8V 8V 12V 15V 24V 38V 3 3V 5V 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 5V 12V 38V System mother board MFC PCB 8V 5V 8V Laser driver PCB 1 8V 5V 8V Laser driver PCB 2 8V 3 3V 5V Image processor PCB 3 3V Inverter PCB ADF 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V Intensity control PCB Scanning lamp heater Intensity sensor PCB 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V 5V 38V 3 5K PD accessory 12V 5V 12V 38V Scanner motor driver PCB Laser scan...

Page 388: ...ction circuit Overcurrent detection circuit 3 3V 8V 8V 15V 5V 12V 24V 38V 24V Output Output Output Output Printer PCB WAKE UP POWER_IN A REMOTE Switching circuit 2 MFC PCB System mother PCB Remote signal control assembly J1407 J525 J505 J503 J1703 J1702 J1701 J1704 J1706 J1701 J1707 J1723 MSW5 Door switch Manual feed tray door switch J1719 3 1 1 x 3 1 1 3 1 1 A31 A11 A31 B12 1 3 4 7 Relay PCB DC p...

Page 389: ...h and the control panel switch Table 9 502 Power Supply and Switch Operation Main power switch OFF ON ON Control panel switch or printer board signal OFF OFF ON Power supply output None 3 3V 5V 8V 8V 12V 15V All Remarks If the heater switch is on the drum heater and the cassette heater are supplied with power AC Supplied only to the following PCBs 3 3V printer PCB accessory 5V printer PCB accessor...

Page 390: ...V 5V 5V 12V 24V 24V 3 3V 5V 8V 8V 12V 15V OFF RLY1 DC power supply PCB Relay PCB DC controller PCB System motherboard MFC PCB Image server hard disk Laser driver PCB 1 Laser driver PCB 2 Image processor PCB Inverter PCB ADF Heater driver PCB Intensity control PCB Scanning lamp heater Intensity sensor PCB 3 5K PD accessory Scanner motor driver PCB Laser scanner motor driver PCB CCD PCB Drum motor M...

Page 391: ...sor PCB 3 3V Inverter PCB ADF 24V Heater driver PCB 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V Intensity control PCB Scanning lamp heater Intensity sensor PCB 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V 5V 38V 3 5K PD accessory 12V 5V 12V 38V Scanner motor driver PCB Laser scanner motor driver PCB 3 3V 5V 8V 15V CCD PCB Drum motor M0 38V 38V Main motor M1 Fixing assembly motor M3 5V 12V 18V 24V 38V 5V 5V 12V 24V HV DC1 PCB 24V HV AC PCB Duplex...

Page 392: ...for the AC input for 100V 120V model 85 to 132 V for 230V model 187 to 264 V Output V Connector No Output voltage tolerance Rated current A Overcurrent protection level A 3 3 J1704 3 5 4 5 4 5 to 5 0 5 J1706 1 J1706 2 4 8 22 to 25 8 J1705 5 10 0 6 1 8 to 2 5 8 J1705 7 10 0 3 1 2 to 2 0 12 J1704 1 7 10 2 1 5 0 to 6 0 15 J1705 9 10 0 5 1 5 to 2 5 24 J1701 3 J1703 1 J1703 2 J1703 3 5 0 3 12 0 23 to 2...

Page 393: ...circuit 1 3 3V 5V 8V 8V 12V 15V Converter circuit 2 24V 38V Sequence control circuit Overcurrent protection circuit 1 Overcurrent protection circuit 2 Overcurrent detection circuit B Overcurrent detection circuit A 5V 12V 3 3V 8V 8V 15V 38V 24V Overcurrent detection signal 1 Overcurrent detection signal 2 Output stop signal 2 Output stop signal 1 J1701 Output 2 5 4 DC power supply PCB Relay PCB Ou...

Page 394: ...etained for Service Mode Table 9 506 Uses Life Replacement After replacement Drives the clock inside the copier Retains the job counter readings Retains the contents shown in user mode Table 9 507 Retains contents shown in service mode Table 9 506 About 5 yr with the power plug disconnected When the MFC PCB is replaced recharging not possible Enter the values on the service label OPTION BODY OPTIO...

Page 395: ...ing is not possible Enter the values recorded on the service label Sets the buzzer Turns on off the cassette auto select mechanism Sets the special tray Selects printing priority Changes power save mode Enables disables inch input Selects paper icons Sets system control management IDs Manage ID by group Set Standard KEY 1 2 Set AUTO ORIENTAITION CUSTOM COPY SETTINGS TIMER SETTINGS ADJUSTMENT CLEAN...

Page 396: ...rd any used battery promptly COPIER ADJUST LAMP AE ADJ XY CCD LASER DEVELOP DENS BLANK V CONT L DATA AE TBL ADJ X ADJ Y ADJ S GAIN E GAIN O OFSET E OFSET O SH TRGT PVE OFST LA DELAY LA PWR A LA PWR B IP DELAY DE DC DE NO DC DE OFST DENS ADJ BLANK T BLANK B EPOTOFST VL OFST VD OFST COPIER ADJUST HV PRI HV TR HV SP FEED ADJ CST ADJ COPIER OPTION BODY GRID TR N1 TR N2 PRE TR SP N1 SP N2 REGIST ADJ RE...

Page 397: ...3 3V 5V 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 3 3V 5V 12V 5V 12V 38V 8V 5V 8V 8V 5V 8V 8V 3 3V 5V 3 3V 24V 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V 24V 24V 38V 38V 24V 5V 38V 12V 5V 12V 38V 3 3V 5V 8V 15V 38V 38V 5V 12V 18V 24V 38V 5V 5V 12V 24V 24V 3 3V 5V 8V 8V 12V 15V OFF RLY1 DC power supply PCB Relay PCB DC controller PCB System motherboard MFC PCB Image server hard disk Laser driver PCB 1 Laser driver PCB 2 Image processo...

Page 398: ...y circuit switches the power supply to sleep mode Figure 9 602 Shift to Sleep Mode Reference DC controller PCB Control panel CPU PCB Control panel power switch A REMOTE Switching circuit MFC PCB System motherboard Remote signal control assembly J1407 J525 J505 J503 J1719 3 A31 A11 B12 B31 Relay PCB CPU IC18 MFC PCB Image processor PCB DC_POWER_OFF Sleep mode shift command When the signal goes 0 sh...

Page 399: ...it MFC PCB System motherboard Remote signal control assembly J1407 J525 J505 J503 J1719 3 A31 A11 B12 B31 Signal from the printer PCB Signal from the control panel power switch Relay PCB CPU IC18 DC_POWER_OFF MFC PCB Image processor PCB When the POWER_IN signal or the WAKE_UP signal is received the DC_POWER_OFF signal goes 1 generating the A REMOTE signal When the remote signal is received the cop...

Page 400: ...ixing heater thereby reducing the power consumption during standby state For details see Cortrolling the Fixing Tempereture in Chapter 8 Reference Related User Mode TIME UNTIL UNIT QUIETS DOWN 0 do not shift to silent mode 1 to 9 min 1 min increments Factory setting Related User Mode ENERGY SAVER MODE 10 25 50 none Factory default The heater switch is off and printer mode is not available 100V 20A...

Page 401: ...mble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws on the rear cover to protect against static electricity 5 Do not leave out the washer that comes with the screw used for the grounding wire and the varistor to ensure electri...

Page 402: ...cartridge cover 3 Upper right cover 4 Manual feed tray cover 5 Upper rear right cover 6 Waste toner case cover 7 Lower right cover 8 Front lower right cover 9 Front lower left cover 10 Rear cover 11 Lower left cover 12 Delivery tray 13 Upper left cover Caution Do not remove the cover shown in the figure If removed and mounted again it will displace the ADF adversely affecting images Figure 9 A703 ...

Page 403: ...r lower right Remove the covers as necessary when cleaning inspecting or repairing the inside of the machine Those covers that may be detached by merely removing their mounting screws are omitted from the discussions 1 Removing the Front Door 1 Open the front door and remove the mounting screw 2 from the door tape 1 2 Open the toner cartridge cover 3 and re move the hinge pin 4 upward from the fro...

Page 404: ...ach the inside upper cover 6 3 Removing the Fixing Feeding Unit Cover 1 Open the front door and shift the fixing feeding assembly lever to slide out the fix ing feeding unit 2 Remove the mounting screw of the releas ing lever then while pushing the releas ing lever at the rear of the fixing feeding unit Figure 8 A502 to the front detach it while the lever is up 3 Remove the mounting screw 3 and de...

Page 405: ...N INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 9 29 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 A708 1 1 1 1 2 4 Removing the Rear Cover 1 Remove the eight mounting screws 1 and detach the rear cover 2 ...

Page 406: ...ol Panel 1 Removing the Control Panel 1 Remove the standard white plate See Figures 3 D511 through D513 2 Remove the copyboard glass and the con trol panel middle cover 3 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the face plate 2 4 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the delivery tray unit 4 5 Remove the two screws 5 and detach the upper right cover 7 while keeping the toner cartridge cover 6 open ...

Page 407: ...B705 6 Remove the four screws 8 from the front cover side and disconnect the three cables 9 then free the cable 10 from the cable clamp and detach the control panel 11 2 Removing the Control Panel Controller CPU PCB and the Control Panel Inverter PCB 1 Remove the four mounting screws 1 and disconnect the eight connectors 2 then detach the control panel controller CPU PCB 3 ...

Page 408: ...2 1 Figure 9 B708 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 2 Remove the two mounting screws 4 and disconnect the two connectors 5 then detach the control panel inverter PCB 6 3 Removing the Control Panel PCB and the LCD Panel 1 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the control panel lower cover 2 2 Remove the CPU PCB 3 Remove the eleven screws 3 and the two screws 4 and detach the CPU PCB ...

Page 409: ...move the nine screws 5 and detach the control panel PCB 6 then remove the three screws 7 and detach the LCD panel 8 Caution When mounting the control panel PCB or the LCD panel to the control panel keep in mind that some locations need to be screwed together with the CPU PCB mounting plate 2 locations on the con trol panel PCB 2 locations on the LCD panel ...

Page 410: ...y Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Remove the inside upper cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and slide out the primary charging fan 2 Caution When mounting the primary charging assembly fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indi cated on the fan 5 Disconnect the connector 3 found on the back of the fan and detach the primary charging asse...

Page 411: ... the fixing assembly heat discharge fan 3 Caution When mounting the fixing heat dis charge fan be sure that the direction of air current match the marking indicated on the fan 3 Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Remove the inside upper cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and slide out the scanner cooling fan 2 Caution When mounting the scan...

Page 412: ...found on the back of the fan and detach the scanner cooling fan 2 4 Removing the Stream Reading Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Remove the inside upper cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and take out the stream reading fan assembly 2 Caution When mounting the stream reading fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan ...

Page 413: ...connect the connector 3 and remove the two screws 4 then detach the stream reading fan 5 5 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 1 Remove the copyboard glass 2 Remove the original sensor unit 1 3 Remove the image processor cover and detach the image processor PCB 4 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the la ser cooling fan 3 together with its mount ...

Page 414: ...he direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan 6 Removing the De Curling Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 3 Remove the fixing feeding unit cover 4 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and re move the four screws 2 then detach the fixing motor mount 3 together with the fixing motor 5 Remove the two screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach th...

Page 415: ... the de curling fan 9 Caution When mounting the de curling fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan 7 Removing the Feeding Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 3 Remove the fixing feeding unit cover 4 Take out the feeding assembly 5 Remove the feeding roller and the feeding belt 6 Remove the four screws 1 and detach the feeding...

Page 416: ...emove the three screws 3 and detach the feeding fan 4 Caution When mounting the feeding fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan 8 Removing the Drum Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC 3 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the drum fan unit 3 3 1 1 2 ...

Page 417: ...e screws 5 then detach the drum fan 6 Caution When mounting the drum fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan 9 Removing the Inverter Cooling Fan 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and slide out the inverter fan 2 Caution When mounting the inverter cooling fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the...

Page 418: ...ECHANISMS Figure 9 C718 Figure 9 C719 3 2 1 3 2 3 Disconnect the connector 3 and detach the inverter cooling fan 2 10 Removing the Pre Transfer Charging Assembly Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then detach the fan motor 3 ...

Page 419: ...arging assembly fan 6 11 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 1 Remove the lower left cover 2 Remove the power supply unit 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fan mount 2 Caution When mounting the power supply cool ing fan 1 be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan Caution When mounting the pre transfer charg ing fan be sure that the direction of...

Page 420: ...fan 1 5 12 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 1 Remove the lower left cover 2 Remove the power supply unit 3 Remove the three screws 1 and detach the fan mount 2 See Figure 9 C721 4 Remove the two screws 3 and discon nect the connector 4 then detach the power supply cooling fan 2 5 Caution When mounting the power supply cool ing fan 2 be sure that the direction of air current matches the mark...

Page 421: ...RY MECHANISMS Figure 9 C724 Figure 9 C725 1 1 2 4 4 3 4 5 13 Removing the Separation Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Slide out the fixing feeding unit 3 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the fixing feeding lower cover 2 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and remove the five screws 4 then detach the sepa ration fan unit 5 ...

Page 422: ...tion When mounting the separation fan be sure that the direction of air current matches the marking indicated on the fan 14 Removing the Laser Scanner Fan 1 Open the front door 2 Remove the inside cover process unit 3 Remove the inside upper cover 4 Remove the two screws 1 and slide out the laser scanner fan 2 Caution When mounting the laser scanner fan be sure that the direction of air current ma...

Page 423: ...NON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 9 47 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 C728 5 Disconnect the connector 3 found on the back of the fan then detach the laser scanner fan 2 3 2 ...

Page 424: ...Figure 9 D701 D Drive Assembly 1 Removing the Left Pickup Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the system box assembly See Fig ure 4 D401 3 Remove the high voltage transformer AC See Figure 9 H701 4 While detaching the belt 1 remove the three screws 2 and detach the left pickup drive assembly 3 1 3 2 2 2 ...

Page 425: ...oving the Pickup Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC See Figure 9 I701 3 Remove the flywheel 4 Remove the drum gear 5 Remove the waste toner pipe 6 Remove the two screws 1 and loosen the harness guide 2 disconnect the two connectors 3 and remove the six screws 4 then detach the pickup drive assem bly 5 ...

Page 426: ...h voltage transformer DC See Figure 9 I701 3 Remove the flywheel See Figure 9 D712 4 Remove the drum gear See Figure 9 D713 5 Remove the waste toner pipe See Figure 9 D715 6 Remove the drum drive assembly Figure 9 D717 7 Remove the waste toner drive assembly See Figure 9 D707 8 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the drum fan 3 9 Disconnect the two connectors 4 and ...

Page 427: ...ANISMS Figure 9 D705 1 2 4 Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the waste toner case 3 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the harness guide 2 4 Disconnect the connector 3 and remove the two screws 4 then detach the verti cal path drive assembly 5 5 4 4 3 Figure 9 D706 ...

Page 428: ...SMS Figure 9 D707 2 1 1 1 5 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC 3 Remove the flywheel 4 Remove the drum gear 5 Remove the waste toner pipe 6 Remove the drum drive assembly 7 Remove the six screws 1 and detach the waste toner drive assembly 2 ...

Page 429: ... Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC 3 Loosen the mounting screw on the rear fixing plate of the registration roller as sembly 4 Remove the four screws 1 and discon nect the four connectors 2 then detach the multifeeder pickup drive assembly 3 Figure 9 D708 ...

Page 430: ...Drive Assembly right deck Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC 3 Remove the flywheel 4 Remove the drum gear 5 Remove the waste toner pipe 6 Remove the screw and loosen the harness guide 1 disconnect the two connectors 2 and remove the four screws 3 then detach the lifter drive assembly for the right deck 4 3 3 3 2 2 1 4 ...

Page 431: ...CHANISMS 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 Figure 9 D710 8 Removing the Lifter Drive Assembly for the left deck Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the system box assembly 3 Remove the DC controller assembly 4 Disconnect the three connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then detach the lifter drive assembly for the left deck 3 ...

Page 432: ...see Figure 9 D713 5 Remove the waste toner pipe See Figure 9 D715 6 Remove the drum drive assembly See Figure 9 D717 7 Remove the waste toner drive assembly See Figure 9 D707 8 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and re move the nine screws 2 then detach the main drive assembly 3 Caution When mounting the main drive assem bly be sure to slide out the fixing feed ing assembly in advance A coupling and ...

Page 433: ...he high voltage transformer DC 3 Open the system box assembly See Fig ure 4 D401 4 Remove the high voltage transformer AC See Figure 9 H701 5 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the flywheel 2 6 Loosen the two screws 3 and remove the binding screw 4 w a spring then detach the gear 5 of the drum shaft Caution When removing the screw from the drum shaft gear pay attention to the di rection of rotatio...

Page 434: ...re 9 D714 Figure 9 D715 7 Remove the waste toner case remove the five screws 6 and disconnect the four connectors 7 then remove the waste toner case mount 8 8 Remove the E ring 10 from the tip of the waste toner pipe 9 slide up the bushing 11 and remove the two screws 12 then remove the waste toner pipe 9 6 6 6 8 7 7 7 10 11 12 9 ...

Page 435: ... S A 9 59 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 D716 13 14 Figure 9 D717 16 15 15 15 16 16 17 9 Remove the screw 13 and detach the drum cleaning pipe cover 14 10 Disconnect the four connectors 15 and remove the five screws 16 then detach the drum drive assembly 17 ...

Page 436: ...1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly Construction 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the high voltage transformer DC 3 Remove the flywheel 4 Remove the drum gear 5 Remove the waste toner pipe 6 Remove the cassette pickup assembly upper lower See Figure 7 B801 7 Remove the five screws 1 and detach the pickup drive assembly 2 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 437: ... Removing the Toner Cartridge Drive Assembly 1 Remove the upper right cover 2 Open the toner cartridge cover and slide out the toner cartridge 3 Remove the four screws 1 and discon nect the connector 2 then detach the toner cartridge drive assembly 3 4 Remove the three screws 4 and discon nect the connector 5 then detach the toner cartrdige drive motor 6 4 5 4 6 ...

Page 438: ... 1 1 2 Figure 9 E702 E Switches 1 Removing the Cover Switch door switch Assembly 1 Remove the inside upper cover See Fig ure 9 A706 2 Remove the control panel See Figure 9 B704 3 Remove the three screws 1 and slide out the cover switch assembly 2 to the front 4 Disconnect the five connectors 3 and detach the cover switch assembly 2 2 3 3 ...

Page 439: ...ure 9 E703 Figure 9 E704 1 3 2 6 5 4 4 2 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly 1 Remove the inside right cover 2 Remove the two screws 1 and discon nect the two connectors 2 then detach the pre transfer charging assembly 3 3 Disconnect the three connectors 4 and remove the screw 5 then detach the po tential sensor PCB 6 ...

Page 440: ...1 1 1 3 4 4 Remove the screw 7 and disconnect the two connectors 8 then remove the manual feed tray switching assembly 9 3 Removing the Drum Heater Switch Assembly 1 Remove the lower left cover 2 Remove the three screws 1 and discon nect the seven connectors 2 then re move the power supply cord mount 3 and release the fixing claw to detach the drum heater switch 4 ...

Page 441: ...INTED IN U S A 9 65 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 F701 1 1 2 1 F DC Controller PCB 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Open the system box assembly 3 Disconnect the 19 connectors on the PCB and remove the four screws 1 then de tach the DC controller PCB 2 ...

Page 442: ...Y MECHANISMS Figure 9 G701 Figure 9 G702 1 1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 G Power Supply Unit 1 Remove the lower left cover 2 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and disconnect the 19 connectors on the relay PCB 2 3 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the cover plate 4 then remove the two screws 5 and detach the power supply unit 6 ...

Page 443: ...tage Transformer AC 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the waste toner case and the waste toner case mount 3 Disconnect the four connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the high voltage transformer assembly AC 3 I High Voltage Transformer DC 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Disconnect the five connectors 1 and remove the two screws 2 then detach the high voltage transformer assembly DC 3 ...

Page 444: ...Y MECHANISMS Figure 9 J701 1 Figure 9 K701 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 J Relay PCB 1 Remove the lower left cover 2 Disconnect the connector from the relay PCB and remove the PCB spacer to de tach the relay PCB 1 K MFC PCB 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the system box 3 Remove the 16 screws 1 and detach the system cover 1 2 ...

Page 445: ...EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 K702 Figure 9 K703 3 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 7 4 Remove the two screws 3 and detach the face plate 4 then remove the three screws 5 and detach the partition plate 6 5 Disconnect the three connectors 7 and remove the four screws 8 then detach the motherboard PCB 9 ...

Page 446: ...C CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS Figure 9 K704 12 11 11 11 11 11 10 10 6 Disconnect the four connectors 10 and remove the seven screws 11 then de tach the MFC PCB 12 ...

Page 447: ... CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 9 71 CHAPTER 9 EXTERNALS AUXILIARY MECHANISMS L Routing the Belt Figure 9 L701 Pickup motor Pickup drive belt Main drive belt Main motor Developing waste toner drive belt ...

Page 448: ...ms and timing at which each associated part is turned on I SIDE PAPER DECK 10 1 A Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver 10 1 B Pickup 10 4 C Deck Paper Detection 10 7 D Deck Lifter 10 9 E Opening Closing the Deck compartment 10 12 F Controlling the Deck Motor 10 14 II DETECTING JAMS 10 18 A Outline 10 18 III DISASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY 10 20 A External Covers 10 21 B Deck Body 10 26 C Drive Mec...

Page 449: ...k open sensor When the compartment is set in the deck 1 When the light blocking sensor is at PS109 J25 1 2 3 5VR Deck paper level sensor J7 1 2 3 5VR Deck feed sensor When PS108 detects the absence of paper level decreasing to half 1 When the light blocking sensor is at PS108 J24 1 2 3 5VR Deck pickup sensor When PS101 detects paper 1 When the light blocking sensor is at PS101 When PS106 detects p...

Page 450: ...100 J3 1 2 3 4 DOPN When SW100 is pushed to open the deck 0 J103 4 3 2 1 Deck open detecting switch SW101 J22 1 2 DOPD When the deck is open 0 When SW101 is not pushed J109 3 1 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 J102 1 2 DLLD When the deck lifter is at the lower limit 1 When SW102 is not pushed J107 8 7 Open switch PCB DOLON NO NO 0VU Power supply 38VU When the deck is open closed 0 Th...

Page 451: ...6 7 11 12 Deck lifter motor J107 9 10 See p 10 14 See p 10 16 Deck feeding clutch 24VU DPFCD When 0 CL101 turns on J11 1 2 J104 6 7 Deck pickup clutch 24VU DPUCD When 0 CL102 turns on J13 2 1 J3 11 12 When 0 SL101 turns on DPRSD 24VU Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL101 J9 2 1 J8 1 2 J104 1 2 When 0 SL102 turns on DOPSD 24VU Deck open solenoid SL102 J23 2 1 J108 1 2 M102 CL101 CL102 M101 Fi...

Page 452: ...key is pressed and the deck pickup clunch CL102 turns on the drive of the deck main motor M101 rotates the pickup roller to start pickup operation At this time the pickup feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheet of paper is picked up Then when the deck pickup sensor PS101 detects paper the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL101 turns on so that the picku...

Page 453: ...0 103 DC controller PCB copier Side deck driver PCB PS106 PS101 CL101 CL102 M101 SL101 Deck pickup detection signal DPPD Deck feed paper detection signal DPFD Deck feeding clutch dive signal DPFCD Deck pickup clutch drive signal DPUCD Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid drive signal DPRSD Deck main motor drive signal ...

Page 454: ...TER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK 3 Sequence of Operations pickup from the deck Figure 10 104 INTR LSTR STBY ON Copy Start key Deck main motor M101 Deck pickup clutch CL102 Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid SL101 Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 Deck feeding clutch CL101 SCAN PRINT ...

Page 455: ...cting lever of the pickup roller assembly leaves the deck paper absent sensor the copier s control panel will indicate the absence of paper Figure 10 105a Paper Present Figure 10 105b Paper Absent 2 Switching the Deck Paper Size To change the deck paper size move the guide plate inside the deck at time of installation or in response to the user s request and enter the new paper size in service mod...

Page 456: ... out and communicate to the copier an approximate level of paper inside its compartment so that the level may be indicated in the copier s control panel Table 10 101 shows the possible combinations of sensor outputs and levels of paper Paper level PS102 PS107 PS108 Control panel indication 1 The light blocking plate is over the sensor 0 The light blocking plate is not over the sensor About 1750 to...

Page 457: ...of some fault The lifter starts to move down as soon as the deck open switch SW100 is pushed and contin ues to move down until the deck paper supply position sensor PS107 leaves the sensor lever falling edge of the sensor output When paper is supplied the paper will push the lever of the deck paper supply position sensor causing the lifter to move farther down until the stack of paper leaves the s...

Page 458: ... roller Deck separation roller Deck pickup feeding roller Lifter Deck lifter motor Deck main motor Deck open detection switch SW101 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck lifter upper limit sensor PS103 Deck open switch SW100 Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck lifter cable Deck paper level sensor PS108 ...

Page 459: ...with a black belt which moves up and down within the indicator window placed in the deck front cover When the level of paper lowers and as a result the lifter moves up to pickup position the area of the black belt within the indicator window increases gradually decreasing the white area so as to indicate the decreasing level of paper M102 Black belt Rack Indicator window Deck lifter motor Deck fro...

Page 460: ... detects the light blocking plate of the compartment and the lifter moves up to the pickup position When the deck lifter motor starts to rotate as when the deck is opened or closed the deck open indicator LED100 on the open switch PCB will turn on or flash Figure 10 108 Deck lifter lower limit detection signal DLLD J107 8 Deck lifter motor drive signal J107 M102 DC controller PCB Side deck driver ...

Page 461: ...lashing Compartment open Off Deck open switch ON Deck open indicator LED100 Deck lifter motor M102 Deck paper supply position sensor PS107 Deck open detecting switch SW101 Deck open solenoid SL102 Deck lifter position sensor PS104 Deck lifter down Deck lifter up Compartment set Varies according to the level of the stack Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck open sensor PS109 ...

Page 462: ...rns on so that the motor starts to rotate at a specific speed On the other hand when the deck main motor drive signal DMON goes 0 the motor drive circuit goes off to stop the motor The copier s DC controller monitors the rotation of the deck motor in reference to the deck main motor PLL lock signal DMPLK if the motor PLL lock signal remains 1 for 900 msec or more while DMON is 1 for some reason th...

Page 463: ...ism that automatically switches pickup feeding speed in response to and based on combinations of the speed switch sig nals DBIT 0 DBIT 1 from the copier s DC controller to the side deck driver PCB The combinations of the speed switch signals are as shown in Table 10 102 In the case of the host copier the motor rotates at high speed Rotation speed High speed Medium speed Low speed DBIT 0 L H L DBIT...

Page 464: ...deck lifter position sensor PS104 does not detect the lifter in about 60 sec after the generation of the deck lifter up signal 1 Conditions Making the Lifter Move Up The deck is connected to the copier deck set signal DSET 1 The deck compartment is closed deck open detection signal DOPND 1 The deck compartment is closed deck open detecting switch ON deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL 0 ...

Page 465: ... paper supply position sensor Deck paper supply position detection signal DPSP Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch SW102 Deck lifter roller limit detection signal DLLD PS109 Deck open sensor Deck open detection signal DOPND PS103 Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck lifter upper limit detection signal DLUL Deck open signal DOPN Deck open detection signal DOPD Deck lifter motor drive signal DLM...

Page 466: ...normally A jam is identified based on the outputs of the signals at such times as instructed by the copier s DC controller When the copier s DC controller identifies a jam all paper moving ahead of the jam is discharged and the operation is stopped Then the copier s control panel shows how to remove jams Figure 10 201 PS106 PS101 Table 10 201 Sensor No PS106 PS101 Name Deck feed sensor Deck pickup...

Page 467: ...m under the following conditions 1 When the copier s power switch is turned on at the end of the WAIT period or in standby paper exists over the deck feed sensor PS106 2 Deck Pickup Vertical Path Delay Jam Copy Start key ON Jam indicator INTR SCAN PRINT Deck pickup clutch CL102 Jam check Deck pickup sensor PS101 Deck feed sensor PS106 Deck main motor M101 Normal Error ...

Page 468: ...ing in mind 1 Disconnect the power plug before disassembly assembly work 2 Assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to disassemble them unless otherwise noted 3 Identify the screws by type length diameter and location 4 Do not leave out the toothed washer that comes with one of the mounting screws to protect against static electricity 5 Do not operate the machine with any of its parts remove...

Page 469: ...e 10 A302 A External Covers 1 Deck releasing grip 2 Upper front cover 3 Compartment open closed detecting switch 4 Front cover 5 Right cover 6 Upper cover 7 Rear cover 1 Removing the Front Cover 1 Release the deck from the copier and push down the latch plate 2 of the com partment 1 then open the compartment 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 rear 1 2 ...

Page 470: ...D IN U S A CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK Figure 10 A303 Figure 10 A304a 3 4 Match 2 Loosen the four screws 3 and remove the front cover 4 of the deck toward the front Caution When mounting the front cover to the deck be sure to match the coupling used as a paper level indicator ...

Page 471: ...ween the front cover and the upper front cover is 3 1 mm Caution If you inadvertently moved the drive belt for the paper level indicator behind the front cover when removing the front cover and cannot find its initial position or moved the deck lifter move down the deck lifter to its lower limit and move the drive belt in the direction of the ar row thereby increasing the while area until it stops...

Page 472: ...ER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK Figure 10 A306 Figure 10 A307 2 Removing the Rear Cover 1 Release the deck and remove the six screws 1 then detach the rear cover 2 3 Removing the Right Cover 1 Remove the three screws 1 and move the right cover 2 to the front then re move it toward the rear 1 1 1 2 2 1 ...

Page 473: ...Cover 1 Remove the rear cover See p 10 24 2 Push down the latch plate 2 of the com partment 1 to open the compartment 1 3 Remove the three screws 3 and discon nect the connector 4 then remove the upper front cover 5 4 Remove the two screws 6 then detach the upper cover 7 Figure 10 A308 Figure 10 A309 Figure 10 A310 rear 1 2 3 4 5 7 6 ...

Page 474: ...PTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK Figure 10 B301 B Deck Body 1 Detaching the Deck from the Copier 1 Place a stack of copy paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for placement of the deck 2 to prevent deformation of the roll support plate 1 2 Remove the right cover See p 10 24 8 cm approx 2 3 3 1 ...

Page 475: ... 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 10 27 CHAPTER 10 SIDE PAPER DECK 3 Remove the four screws 5 and detach the deck 6 from the deck base 7 4 Hold the deck 8 as shown and place it on the stack of paper prepared in step 1 Figure 10 B302 Figure 10 B303 left 5 7 right 6 5 8 ...

Page 476: ...Figure 10 B305 2 Removing the Compartment 1 Place a stack of copy paper 3 about 8 cm in height on the floor for placement of the deck 2 to prevent deformation of the roll support plate 1 2 Detach the deck from the copier and push down the latch plate 5 of the compart ment 4 to open the compartment 4 8 cm approx 2 3 1 3 rear 5 4 ...

Page 477: ...rew 6 and the stopper plate 7 then slide the compartment 8 farther out 4 Remove the right cover See p 10 24 5 Remove the screw 9 of the harness guide and disconnect the connector 10 then remove the three left and right screws each 12 and detach the com partment 8 toward the front while lifting it slightly 6 Place the compartment 8 on the stack of copy paper prepared in step 1 9 12 11 12 10 8 ...

Page 478: ...l paper 2 If the lifter of the deck is up turn on the copier s power switch and push down the sensor lever 2 of the paper supply posi tion sensor inside the compartment 1 to move down the lifter to its lower limit 3 Remove the screw 3 and mount the pa per trailing edge guide plate 4 to suit the new paper size 4 Likewise remove one screw each 5 and mount the left and right guide plates 6 to suit th...

Page 479: ...the two screws 2 At this time use the scale graduation 3 on the latch plate as a guide 5 Adjusting the Position of the Roll If the compartment cannot be opened closed smoothly requiring adjustment of the position for the roll mounted to the front of the deck perform the following 1 Remove the front cover See p 10 21 2 With the compartment fully slid out turn the four mounting screws 4 on the roll ...

Page 480: ...the E ring 2 then detach the deck pickup clutch 3 Caution When mounting the pickup clutch be sure to put the clutch into the slip stop 4 Be sure also to hook the harness on the U groove 5 of the guide 2 Removing the Deck Feeding Clutch CL101 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 10 39 2 Remove the harness retainer 1 and dis connect the connector 2 then remove the E ring 3 and detach the deck feeding...

Page 481: ...not to damage the gear at the tip of the motor spindle 4 Removing the Deck Lifter Motor M102 1 Open the compartment of the deck and remove all copy paper 2 Turn on the copier s power If the lifter of the deck is up push down the sensor lever 1 of the paper supply position sensor Stop the lifter 2 when it is about 7cm from the base plate of the compartment and insert a hex wrench into the hole of t...

Page 482: ...g the Lifter Cable front of the deck 1 Open the compartment of the deck and remove all paper 2 Remove the screw and detach the paper trailing edge guide plate from inside the compartment 3 Push the lever 1 of the paper supply po sition sensor inside the compartment to move down the lifter when the holes on the left and right of the compartment side plate and the holes on the left and right of the ...

Page 483: ...e pulley cover 7 7 Remove the two screws 8 and detach the cable fixing plate 9 on the left side then detach the lifter cable 10 on the outside 8 Remove the two screws 11 and detach the cable fixing plate 12 on the right side then detach the lifter cable 13 on the inside 9 To detach the lifter cable 13 on the in side from the pulley 14 on the inside re move the two set screws 16 on the pulley 15 on...

Page 484: ... left and right holes in the compartment side plate and the left and right holes of the lifter match then insert two long screw drivers 2 through the holes At this time match the top surface of the lifter with the marking on the compart ment left side plate to facilitate matching the holes 4 Remove the compartment See p 10 28 5 Remove the screw 3 and detach the sen sor plate 4 6 Remove one screw e...

Page 485: ... Insert a hex wrench 11 into the hole of the lifter drive shaft 10 to hold it in place thereby preventing it from rotating Caution If you fail to prevent the lifter drive shaft from rotating the lifter cable will be come slack as soon as you remove the lifter motor unit 9 Remove five screws 12 and detach the lifter motor unit 13 10 11 12 12 13 ...

Page 486: ...y 4 4 Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the pulley 5 of the lifter drive shaft then wind the cable along the groove of the pulley about 1 5 times At this time be sure to keep the lifter cable taut until the long screwdrivers are slightly lifted and stopped 5 Secure the pulley to the lifter drive shaft with two set screws 6 6 Mount all pulleys that have been removed back to the lifter drive shaf...

Page 487: ... Unit 1 Remove the upper cover See p 10 25 2 Disconnect the two connectors 1 and re move the five screws 2 3 Remove the deck pickup unit 3 Caution When mounting the deck pickup unit 3 be sure to use the three screws shown in Figure 10 D302 2 Removing the Deck Pickup Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 10 39 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit then re move the resin ring 1 one each and de tach ...

Page 488: ...r When mounting the deck pickup roller 4 at the rear be sure that the marking 5 on the side of the roller and the marking 6 on the collar silver are toward the rear 4 Removing the Deck Pickup Feeding Roller 1 Remove the deck pickup unit See p 10 39 2 Turn over the deck pickup unit 3 Remove the resin ring 1 and detach the deck pickup feeding roller 2 and the drive belt 3 toward the front Figure 10 ...

Page 489: ...ey 2 is to ward the front When mounting the pickup feeding roller rubber piece to the pickup feeding roller shaft be sure that the marking 3 is toward the rear 6 Removing the Deck Separation Roller 1 Detach the deck from the copier and re move the two screws 1 then detach the separation roller support plate 2 2 Remove the joint and detach the deck separation roller 3 Figure 10 D307a Figure 10 D307...

Page 490: ...general characteristic of urethane sponge and does not affect its perfor mance and the part is not identified by color 7 Adjusting the Pressure of the Deck Separation Roller If double feeding or pickup failure occurs when the deck is used as the source of paper change the position of the deck separation roller pressure spring If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A If ...

Page 491: ...oid SL101 Take note of the position of the two fixing screws 2 used for the deck pickup roller re leasing solenoid 1 before detaching it from its support plate with reference to the scale graduations on the plate Or mark the position on the support plate with a scriber if you are replacing the solenoid on its own in this case be sure to mount it back to its initial position 1 2 ...

Page 492: ...tach the deck from the copier then re move the six screws and detach the rear cover 2 Disconnect the nine connectors 1 and remove the four screws 2 then detach the deck driver PCB 3 2 Removing the Open Switch PCB 1 Detach the deck from the copier and push down the latch plate 2 of the compart ment 1 then open the compartment 1 Figure 10 E301 Figure 10 E302 1 3 2 rear 2 1 ...

Page 493: ...3 Figure 10 E304 3 4 5 7 6 2 Remove the three screws 3 and discon nect the connector 4 then detach the upper front cover 5 3 Remove the two screws 6 and detach the open switch PCB 7 Caution When mounting the upper front cover take care to avoid trapping the harness by the open switch PCB and be sure to connect all connectors ...

Page 494: ...veloping Assembly 11 13 F Mounting the Pick Up Assembly 11 14 G Supplying Toner 11 15 H Mounting the ADF 11 16 I Checking Images Operations user mode 11 17 J Changing the Size of the Front Deck right and left 11 20 III RELOCATING THE COPIER 11 21 IV INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V 11 22 V INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II 11 27 VI INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER A1 11 36 A Setting the B...

Page 495: ...lar avoid areas near water faucets water boilers humidifiers and refrigera tors 3 The area must not be near sources of fire and the site must not be subject to dust or ammonium gas If direct sunshine is expected provide curtains 4 The level of ozone generated by the copier will not harm the health of the people working around it However some individuals may find the odor unpleasant and it is impor...

Page 496: ...ust from one copier will not be drawn into another Further avoid placing a copier near the air vent of the room Figure 11 101 In general the silicone gas generated by a copier tends to soil corona charging wires shortening the wire life Keep in mind that this is particularly true in a low humidity environment Result of silicone oil evaporating from the fixing assembly Figure 11 102 Exhaust Wrong 1...

Page 497: ...Use the following as a guide when planning a working area Copier Finisher Copier Finisher Side Paper Deck Copier Copy Tray 250 cm min 120 cm min 10 cm min 50 cm min Copier 200 cm min 50 cm min 310 cm min 120 cm min 10 cm min 110 cm min Copier 200 cm min 50 cm min 180 cm min 50 cm min 10 cm min 50 cm min Copier 200 cm min 50 cm min ...

Page 498: ...hem separately from the copier If the ADF is installed be sure to remove it also 2 When holding the copier do not use the hand grips of the pickup assembly delivery assembly instead support it by grasping the four corners of its bottom B Shift up the two adjusters front on the copier s bottom to make sure that they are un locked Further take care so that the adjusters will not slip off the copier ...

Page 499: ...e out the grip from inside the shipping box Remove the grip cover rear from the right side of the copier and shift up the grip at the rear Open the upper right door and slide the face cover small to the rear to remove then detach the face cover large Push in the grip removed in step 2 into the slot at the front Remarks A Unpacking Grip rear Grip covers Grip front Grip cover Grip Face cover small F...

Page 500: ...ft the copier slightly and remove the pad Likewise holding the grips on the delivery side lift the copier slightly and remove the pad At this time be sure to remove the plastic bag Shift up the two adjusters front on the bottom of the copier and check to make sure that they are unlocked Take out the two slope plates stored in the middle of the skid Remarks Skid Slope plate ...

Page 501: ...th the copier and take out the parts and sub members Check that none of the attachments is missing Put away the grip used in step 4 in the compartment behind the front cover Mount the face covers right and left that have been removed Remarks Grip Front cover Caution Before moving on to the next steps check to see if there is condensation on the outside or the inside of the copier right after takin...

Page 502: ...TALLATION B Mounting the Scanner No 1 2 3 Work Remove the packaging tape from the copier Open the ADF Remove the protective pad of the copyboard glass Slide the scanner fixing to the front to remove Store away the metal fixing for possible future relocation of the machine Remarks Tape Scanner fixing ...

Page 503: ...separation charging assembly Slide out the fixing feeding unit to the front Remove the tag and the separation assembly releasing member from above the fixing feeding assembly Caution Be sure to remove all traces of glue from tape and foreign matter from the feeding belt Remove the tag retaining tape and remove the two fixing nip releasing screws at the front and the rear Remarks Fixing feeding uni...

Page 504: ...ration charging wire Mount the transfer separation charging assembly with the following in mind The charging assembly must be completely dry The charging wire cleaning member is at the center The gut wire is not forced against the transfer guide The grounding plate is positioned on the outside of the frame See the diagram on the right Connect the connector of the transfer separation charging assem...

Page 505: ...lean the primary charging wire and the grid wire using alcohol Remove the screw and detach the front cover of the pre transfer charging assembly Disconnect the connector then unlock the pre transfer charging assembly and take out the charging assembly Clean the pre transfer charging wire with alcohol Remarks Front cover of the primary charging assembly Screw Connector Unlock Primary charging assem...

Page 506: ...mbly and connect the connector With the lock released insert the pre transfer charging assembly and connect the connector Caution Check to make sure that the one way arm of the transfer charging assembly is on top of the eccentric cam Mount the primary charging assembly cover and the pre transfer charging assembly cover with one screw each Close the front door Remarks One way arm Eccentric cam ...

Page 507: ...he cylinder surface for damage Holding the center of the developing assembly pocket of the grip mount it in the copier Then connect two connectors Caution When mounting the developing assembly try inserting it from high above taking care not to bring the developing cylinder into contact with the metal plate of the develop ing assembly base Secure the developing assembly locking unit in place with ...

Page 508: ...en take out the pick up roller releasing spacer Open the upper right door and the lower right door Then push the releasing button of the front deck R cassettes 3 and 4 and slide them out half way Remove the three pick up roller releasing spacers Secure the deck pressure plate to the front deck left with an RS tightening screw M4 6 white Remarks Pick up roller releasing spacer Pick up roller releas...

Page 509: ...dge from the packaging box Remove the packing tape Open the hopper cover and insert the toner cartridge from the front of the copier Caution Insert the toner cartridge until the marking of the toner cartridge and the marking of the copier come into contact Close the hopper cover Remarks Toner cartridge Packing tape Hopper cover Toner cartridge Toner cartridge Marking ...

Page 510: ...connector into the socket on the back of the copier With the ADF open mount the ADF document tray with two RS tightening screws M4 8 white Caution When mounting the ADF original tray fit the hook of the tray in the copier s groove and slide it to the left before securing it in place with screws Attach the ADF manual feed instructions label to the manual feed tray of the ADF Remarks Connector Screw...

Page 511: ...hen slide out the cassettes to the front and remove the packing material Set the side plates of the cassettes 3 and 4 against the holes A4 A3 of the marking M Fit the stops into the holes identified as follows so that the bottom of the cassette will not lift A STMT R H LTR R Caution This step applies only if the user does not use Inch configured paper Connect the power plug to the outlet then turn...

Page 512: ...elect INSTALL Select TONER S Check that the message CHECK THE DEVELOPER is indicated Check to make sure that the developing assembly and the developing assembly locking plate have been mounted correctly then press the OK key The copier will start toner supply operation about 10 min When the operation ends press the Reset key twice to end service mode Remarks Starting Service Mode 1 Press the User ...

Page 513: ...rmal Make double sided copies to check the operation Make settings for standard mode in user mode and service mode to suit the user s needs Press the Reset key twice to end service mode Clean up the area around the copier Move the copier to the site of installation and fix the copier in place using the adjusters If you need to install accessories install them now according to the instructions give...

Page 514: ...nd fix the guide plate in position to suit the new size Remove the screw one each from the left and right guide plates Then fix the guide plates in position to suit the new size Put paper in the deck Attach the new size sticker to the paper size plate of the deck Slide the deck into copier Start service mode and register the new paper size Remarks For deck R COPIER OPTION CST P SZ C1 For deck L CO...

Page 515: ...s bottom to make sure that they are un locked Further take care so that the adjusters will not slip off the copier during transpor tation C When delivering the copier into out of the user s be sure to remove the accessories side paper deck finisher Work Make a copy in Direct Remove all paper from all cassettes Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Fix the No 2 mir...

Page 516: ...to make sure that the image memory lamp is off before turning off the main power switch 1 Removing the Control Panel 1 Remove the screw one each and detach the two magnet plates from the top of the control panel 2 Remove the screw and detach the pri mary charging assembly cover Figure 11 401 Magnet plate Magnet plate Screws Primary charging assembly cover Screw ...

Page 517: ...ors and de tach the dust proofing glass 4 Slide out the feeding assembly 5 Remove the four screws and detach the process unit cover 6 Remove the five screws and detach the inside cover upper Figure 11 403 Figure 11 404 Connectors Dust proofing glass Figure 11 405 Process unit cover Screws to prevent displacement Inside cover upper Screws ...

Page 518: ...tree fixing screws and detach the control panel 2 Before Installing the Control Card 1 Remove the three screws and detach the control panel back cover 2 Remove the screw and then remove the inlet face plate Figure 11 406 Figure 11 407 Figure 11 408 Control panel Screws Inlet face plate Screw Screws Control panel back cover ...

Page 519: ... Card 1 Secure the control card in place to the con trol panel with four screws that come with the unit Caution Secure the control card in place so that it will not come into contact with the con trol panel cover when a card is inserted through the slot 2 Lead the grounding wire through the wire saddle and secure it in place with one screw w washer that comes with the unit Control Card V Screws Sc...

Page 520: ...orting connector 4 Secure the control panel in place to the copier 5 Remove the protective sheet from the con trol panel label of the control card 6 Attach the control panel label to the con trol card 7 Connect the connectors and mount the covers that have been disconnected or re moved 8 Turn on the copier s main power switch and the control panel switch then check the operation of the control car...

Page 521: ...bserve all applicable regulations of the country 2 Check to make sure that the host copier has been properly installed 3 Disconnect the copier s power plug before starting the work 4 Identify the screws by type length diam eter and location 5 Prepare the computer at the service station with the necessary settings 1 Remove the two screws 2 and detach the upper cover 1 of the controller Figure 11 50...

Page 522: ...2 Connect the connector 3 of the power supply unit to the connector 4 of the con troller as shown 3 Remove the four screws 6 and detach the face plate 5 from the copier s rear cover 4 Connect the connector J521 7 of the copier and the cable of the controller Figure 11 502 Figure 11 503 Figure 11 504 4 3 5 6 7 ...

Page 523: ... Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the controller bundle the excess length of the cable and secure it in place with the harness band 9 7 Shift SW2 4 10 of the DIP switch to ON so as to select IPC for communication between controller and copier Figure 11 505 Figure 11 506 Figure 11 507 8 8 8 8 9 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 524: ...1 501 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 12 11 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 SW2 13 Figure 11 509 Switch SW3 1 SW3 2 SW3 3 SW3 4 SW3 5 SW3 6 Setting See right OFF ON OFF ON OFF Description SW3 1 SW3 2 Description OFF OFF Set the modem signal transmission level to 16 dBm ON OFF Set t...

Page 525: ...he bits of the DIP switch 15 SW2 on the PCB of the controller as shown in the following table and push the push switch 16 SW4 so that LED5 17 red turns on Figure 11 511 Figure 11 510 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 14 LED1 LED2LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 15 16 17 SW2 bits SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 SW2 4...

Page 526: ...so that LED5 17 red turns off to indicate that the RAM has been cleared 13 Shift SW2 6 on the DIP switch 18 on the PCB of the controller to OFF Figure 11 512 Figure 11 513 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 15 16 17 LED1 LED2LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 18 SW2 bits SW2 1 SW2 2 SW2 3 ...

Page 527: ...extension function of the controller is to be used connect the existing tele phone or the fax to the connector 20 TEL of the controller and connect the telephone line to the connector 19 LINE of the controller 15 Call the service station and ask for initial settings for the controller In response to a signal LED 4 21 red of the controller should start to flash 16 Call the service station to find o...

Page 528: ... it should turn off to indicate the end of transmission and should flash if the trans mission ends in failure If LED6 22 is flashing press the push switch SW4 16 once again to try re transmission If the push switch SW1 23 is pressed while LED6 22 is flashing on the other hand the controller cancels transmission attempts 18 Check to make sure that the communica tion between the controller and the c...

Page 529: ... the copier s Copy Start key and check to make sure that LED3 25 pink flashes for each delivery 20 Attach the switch settings label 26 to the upper cover of the controller and record the latest switch settings 21 Secure the upper cover 1 of the control ler with two screws 2 When doing so check to make sure that the cable of the power supply unit is fitted to the cable guide and it is not trapped b...

Page 530: ...et the DIP switches SW1 and SW5 on the controller to suit the needs of the user 2 1 Set SW1 4 of the DIP switch to suit the type of the host copier 2 2 Set SW5 2 DIP switch to suit the appro priate paper size if group control is planned To use AB papers A3 A4 B4 B5 keep the bit to OFF To use Inch papers 11 17 LTR LGL STMT keep it to ON VI INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER A1 Figure 11 A601 2 2 1...

Page 531: ...ustment For normal operation For control of Inch papers 11 17 LTR LGL STMT For control of AB papers A3 A4 B4 B5 For service mode For normal operation For group control For no group control NP6030 NP6060 NP8530 NP9800 Other than above Requires the Interface Board B1 For remote control using a commercially available modem requires a modem and the Interface Board B1 For controlling paper other than t...

Page 532: ...it the needs of the user A If the Communication Control Board A1 or the Interface Board B1 is to be con nected requiring the Power Supply A1 B If the Communication Control Board A1 or the Interface Board B1 is not to be con nected not requiring the Power Supply A1 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 JB1 JB2 JA2 JA1 1 6 Photo...

Page 533: ...o make sure that the host copier has been properly installed 3 Disconnect the copier s power plug before starting the work 4 Identify the screws by type length diam eter and location 5 Prepare the computer at the service station with the necessary settings 1 Remove the four screws 2 and detach the face plate 1 of the copier s rear cover 2 If the Card Reader A1 is to be installed connect the card r...

Page 534: ... 8 of the con troller and the 8P connector 9 J521 of the copier s DC controller 4 If the Card Reader A1 is to be installed connect the relay cable 9P for the card reader connected to J4 of the controller to the 9P connector J520 of the copier s DC control 5 Secure the controller to the copier s rear cover with four screws 10 Use the screws that come with the unit 10 10 ...

Page 535: ...UNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 11 41 CHAPTER 11 INSTALLATION Figure 11 B605 6 Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the controller Bundle the excess length of the cable and secure it with the harness band 11 11 ...

Page 536: ...ring the Power Supply A1 go to step 4 Connect the connector 1 of the power supply to the connector 2 of the control ler securely as shown Check to make sure that the cord is in the groove of the board 2 Connect the power supply to the power plug and check to make sure that LED1 of the controller turns on 2 1 Groove of the board 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA...

Page 537: ...he con troller flashes Make a copy and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying operation 4 If the Communications Board A1 or the Interface Board B1 is to be connected re quiring the Power Supply A1 go to 5 Turn on the copier s main switch and check to make sure that LED1 of the con troller turns on and LED2 turns off Make a copy and check to make sure that LED3 flashes during copying o...

Page 538: ...roup control is planned set the input method control mode and paper size to suit the needs of the user Shift SW5 3 of the DIP switch of the con troller to ON 6 Connect the connector 3 of the Numeric Keypad A1 to the connector J3 4 of the controller 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 JB2 JB1 JA1 JA2 EPROM SRAM CPU IPC JC9 JC6 JC5 JC8 J5 1 6 SW5 3 1 6 Photocoupler 4 3 ...

Page 539: ...ollowing using the keys on the keypad To change ID to card on the other hand requiring the Card Reader A1 go to 8 4 MANAGE CARD is indicated 8 3 Press the 2 key and press the ENT key MANAGE ID is indicated 8 4 To change to card input When MANAGE ID is indicated press the 1 key and then press the ENT key MANAGE CARD will be indicated SW2 1 6 SW4 SW1 ON SW5 ON LED6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 SW2 SW3 J...

Page 540: ... a Set the DIP switch SW1 of the controller as follows b Press the switch SW4 on the controller In response LED5 turns on momentarily c Check LED5 it should turn on to indicate that the data has been drawn Otherwise LED5 will flash Press the switch SW4 once again and see that LED5 turns on The copier cannot discharge paper while data is being drawn d Set the DIP switch SW1 on the control as follow...

Page 541: ... 9 3 For example to select 3 1 FORMAT 1 is indicated To change the initial setting 1 to 3 Press the 3 key To clear the input press the c key for retry To cancel press the ESC key 2 When FORMAT 3 is indicated press the ESC key 3 FORMAT 3 is indicated and the cursor flashes for a while to indicate that formatting is taking place When the cursor stops to flash the control mode is set to 3 Caution Whe...

Page 542: ...efore is not indicated EX 1 1 SIZE 1 A3 is indicated 2 Press the v key 3 SIZE 2 A4 is indicated 4 Press the v key 5 SIZE 3 B4 is indicated 6 Press the v key 7 SIZE 4 B5 is indicated 8 Press the key 9 SIZE 3 B4 is indicated 10 Press the key 11 SIZE 2 A4 is indicated EX 2 1 Press the v key to indicate SIZE 3 B4 2 Find the size of LGL form the conver sion code tables Table 11 C604 and press 1 and 3 3...

Page 543: ...ode B5 FOOLS A4 B4 A3 U SMALL US STMT U LARGE UL LTR LGL LDR 11 7 A5 A FOOLS A6 FOLIO COMPUTER U SMALL 2 1 2 3 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 17 18 19 21 23 24 Postcard Jpn U LARGE2 GLTR 10 8 G LGL K LGL OFFICIO E OFFICIO A OFFICIO B OFFICIO A LT R A LGL 12 18 B3 A2 17 22 18 24 25 26 27 28 29 33 35 36 37 38 39 41 48 49 50 51 52 Conversion Code Table ...

Page 544: ...ee Table 11 A601 If the settings are wrong go back to Set ting the Board to make the appropriate settings If you are setting the Interface Board B1 Interface Board A1 or Communications Control Board A1 accessories see its respective Installation Procedure 11 4 Press the switch SW2 Figure 11 C610 Figure 11 C611 S1 S5 SW1 1 SW1 2 SW1 3 SW1 4 SW1 5 SW1 6 SW5 1 SW5 2 SW5 3 SW5 4 SW5 5 SW5 6 bits are a...

Page 545: ...ad 12 Attach the switch settings label 6 to the cover 5 of the controller and record the latest switch settings on the label 13 Secure the cover of the controller with two screws 7 When doing so check to make sure that the cable of the power sup ply unit is fitted to the cable guide and is not trapped by the upper cover 14 To Connect the Control Card Printer A1 connect it to the connector J4 of th...

Page 546: ...If the cable is all inside the controller end the work by attaching the petty pull 8 to the lower right of the copier s back 16 Fit the cable used to connect the controller to the petty pull 17 Check to make sure that no cord is trapped by the copier or the sorter casters Figure 11 C615 8 Copy Data Controller A1 ...

Page 547: ...crews Screw Harness unit Heater unit Figure 11 701 Necessary Parts Heater assembly 1pc FG2 9812 000 for 220 240V model use Heater cable guide 1pc FG2 9195 000 Screw 2pc XA9 0628 000 Screw 1pc XB6 7400 609 1 Turn off the copier and disconnect its power plug 2 Mount the heater cable guide to the heater with a screw and connect the connector Heater cable guide Heater Screw Connector Hook at the rear ...

Page 548: ...Screw Screw Screw Figure 11 703 Figure 11 704 3 Remove the copier s rear cover 4 Disconnect the connector of the DC con troller PCB and free it from the wire saddle Remove the three fixing screws and de tach the DC controller PCB 5 Press releasing button of the front deck R and slide out it Detach the stoppers from both ends and take out the deck R Take out the front deck L in the same way ...

Page 549: ...STALLATION 6 Slide out the cassettes 3 and 4 and re move the inside cassettes 7 Insert the heater unit to which the har ness unit is secured so that it will be un der the holding plate found between the copier s cassettes 3 and 4 Inside cassette Remove Figure 11 705 Heater Slide inside Figure 11 706 ...

Page 550: ...rness unit Fit in the groove Figure 11 707 Figure 11 708 Caution 1 Check to make sure that the hook at the rear of the heater unit is in the groove Caution 2 Check to make sure that the connector at the tip of the heater cable guide is in the groove of the copier rear plate and in addition that the heater cable guide is securely in the groove ...

Page 551: ...er unit in place with two screws 9 Connect the connector of the heater unit and the copier s connector 10 Mount the DC controller PCB and the rear cover 11 Set all cassettes 12 Connect the power plug and turn on the power switch Connector copier side Connector heater side Connect Figure 11 709 Figure 11 710 Heater unit Screws ...

Page 552: ... AND SERVICING This chapter discusses those of the copier s parts that require inspection and maintenance I PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS 12 1 II DURABLES TABLE 12 2 A Copier 12 2 B Side Paper Deck 12 5 III SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART 12 6 IV SCHEDULED SERVICING ITEMS 12 8 A Copier 12 8 B Work Steps 12 11 ...

Page 553: ...Table 12 101 Figure 12 101 1 Primary charging assembly 1 Pre transfer charging assembly 4 No 2 thermistor 2 Primary grid wire 1 Transfer separation charging assembly 3 Thermistor 5 Thermal switch As of January 2000 No 1 2 3 4 5 Parts name Primary pre transfer separation charging wire Primary grid wire Thermistor No 2 thermistor Thermal switch Parts No FY3 0030 000 FY1 0883 000 FH7 7463 000 FH7 746...

Page 554: ...aner 1 Primary charging wire cleaner 2 Transfer charging wire cleaner 1 Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 Separation charging wire cleaner Pre transfer charging wire cleaner Pre transfer charging assembly scraper Upper fixing roller Lower fixing roller Parts No FH7 3347 FB4 1819 FB5 3111 FS5 6579 FB4 8018 FB4 1596 FG6 2015 FG6 2045 FG6 2016 FF2 3552 FF2 3551 FF5 6883 FF5 6884 FF5 7891 FF5 3090 FF5 ...

Page 555: ... guide Front Parts No FY1 1157 FB2 7239 FC1 0391 FA2 9037 FB4 2033 FB4 2034 FB2 7777 FB4 2033 FB4 2035 FB2 7545 FF5 9544 FF5 9413 FF5 9543 Q ty 1 2 6 2 8 8 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 Life copies 500 000 500 000 500 000 1 000 000 250 000 250 000 250 000 120 000 120 000 120 000 500 000 500 000 500 000 Remarks Simultaneously with upper fixing roller Actual copies made may be checked in ser vice mode Use 2 for eac...

Page 556: ... 12 4 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 1 2 3 3 4 5 22 22 22 22 23 23 23 24 24 24 23 24 24 25 26 27 Figure 12 201a Figure 12 201b 13 12 11 10 10 9 9 14 15 6 7 8 16 17 18 19 19 20 21 20 28 29 30 ...

Page 557: ...NCE AND SERVICING B Side Paper Deck Table 12 202 Figure 12 202 1 2 3 As of January 2000 No 1 2 3 Parts name Side paper deck pickup roller Side paper deck feeding roller Side paper deck separation roller Parts No FB4 2033 000 FB4 2034 000 FB2 7777 020 Q ty 2 2 1 Life copies 250 000 250 000 250 000 Remarks ...

Page 558: ... grid wire primary charging assembly shielding plate roll electrode Checks Check the general conditions Check the faulty copies Check the following a image density b background for soiling c characters for clarity d leading edge margin e fixing registration and back for dirt Remarks Standards single sided copying Leading edge 4 0 1 5 1 0mm Left right 2 5 1 5mm Trailing edge 2 5 1 5mm Dry wipe with...

Page 559: ...ding rollers Clean the fixing delivery assembly separation claw upper lower various feeding rollers inlet guide cleaning belt check cleaning belt oil pan thermistor No 2 thermistor thermal switch Clean the cleaning assembly side scraper Clean the duplexing unit duplexing horizontal registration sensor Clean the copyboard glass Make test copies Make sample copies Checks Check the tension of the cab...

Page 560: ...fter replacing the leakage breaker make sure that it operates properly Record the history of checkin the leakage breaker in the Service Book Remarks Work Press the leakage breaker test switch to make sure that the breaker operates mormally After the check turn off the power switch and shift the lever to the ON side Then turn on the power switch Caution Check to make sure that ground ing has been m...

Page 562: ...silicone oil FY9 6011 No 1 through No 3 mirrors Dust proofing glass Ozone filter FM2 FM8 Remove the dust from the surface of the filter See Figure 12 401 Dust proofing filter FM1 FM3 FM4 FM10 FM14 Remove the dust from the surface of the filter See Figure 12 401 Clean Replace Oil Adjust Inspect Part Intervals Instal lation Remarks every 250 000 every 500 000 every 750 000 every 1 000 000 Reflecting...

Page 563: ...e Transfer guide Registration roller upper lower Feeding belt Various feeding rollers Inlet guid Cleaning belt Remove the slack at installation Oil receptacle Thermistor No 2 thermistor Thermal switch Toner replace the rear front For details of work see item 1 of B 1 Work Slip ring electrode for drum heater Clean the following with alcohol then apply grease FY9 6008 electrode of the slip ring prot...

Page 564: ...ON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A Ozone filter for FM8 Dust proofing filter for FM4 Dust roofing filter for FM10 Dust proofing filter for FM1 Dust proofing filter for FM14 Dust proofing filter for FM3 Ozone filter for FM2 Figure 12 401 ...

Page 565: ...ng for the parts associ ated with the drum 1 Work 1 a Cleaning the toner pan 1 Slide out the fixing feeding unit from the copier 2 Unlock the slide rails and slide the fixing feeding unit farther out 3 Remove the screw 3 and remove the toner pan rear front then remove the toner from the toner pan Figure 12 402 Figure 12 403 Toner pan Cleaning assembly 3 ...

Page 566: ...on Do not rotate the magnet roll drive as sembly during work Otherwise waste toner may fall through the cleaner as sembly 1 Slide out the process unit Be sure to place the drum protective sheet over the fixing feeding unit 2 Take out the photosensitive drum 3 Moisten lint free paper 1 with 5 to 10 cc of alcohol 2 then pour 0 2 to 0 3 g of drum cleaning powder CK 0429 3 on the lint free paper Figur...

Page 567: ... 5 to 10 cm in the peripheral direction of the drum Move the lint free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times over a single area Forcing the lint free paper will not af fect the life of the drum 5 When the alcohol has evaporated dry wipe the surface with lint free paper If the area is uneven go back to step 4 and increase the back and forth movements 6 Rotate the drum for the width 5 to 10 cm and rep...

Page 568: ...rom the front to the rear and then from the rear to the front to break any cake of toner 9 Remove the cleaning blade from the cleaning blade assembly 10 Put the reversed or new cleaning blade 7 against the edge of the rear of the blade retaining plate 8 Caution When butting the cleaning blade be sure to apply force to eliminate any gap Figure 12 407 4 5 6 Figure 12 408 7 8 Butted against the edge ...

Page 569: ...or screws 6 trough 10 Caution 2 When mounting the cleaning blade be sure to put the blade auxiliary plate be tween the blade support plate and the blade back plate 12 Apply toner on the cleaning blade where it comes into contact with the photosensi tive drum then mount the cleaning blade Caution 3 After mounting the cleaning blade ro tate the drum if toner slips through the blade repeat the forego...

Page 570: ...13 118 A Copy Paper Jams 13 118 B Faulty Feeding 13 123 VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS 13 124 A Clutches 13 124 B Solenoids 13 126 C Motors 13 128 D Fans 13 130 E Sensors 1 13 132 F Sensors 2 13 134 G Switches 13 136 H Counters Heaters Fuses and Others 13 138 I PCBs 13 140 J Side Paper Deck 13 142 K Variable Registers VR Light Emitting Diodes and Check Pins by PCB 13 146 VII UPGRADING THE C...

Page 571: ...ay be absent and so forth If you want to find out the checks or action to take make checks according to the steps under Checks and perform the work under Action Answer the question under each check to make Yes or No and take the appropriate action Otherwise go to the next step and make the check under it Checks Is the power plug connected to the power outlet Is the front cover closed securely Is t...

Page 572: ...t you are to connect the or probe of the meter to its respective terminal for example for J109 1 and J109 2 connect the positive probe to J109 1 and the negative probe to J109 2 Checks Yes No Action NO 1 Step NO 2 NO 3 YES YES YES The rest is omitted Is the power plug connected to the power outlet Are the front door and the covers closed firmly Connect the power plug Close the front door and the c...

Page 573: ... printer 2 PG6 blank reader 3 PG7 halftone reader 4 PG8 solid black reader Go to 3 Checking the Scanner Side Check the following 1 height of the charging wire Making Pre Checks Clean the following 1 grid wire 2 primary charging wire 3 pre transfer charging wire 4 transfer charging wire If the test print has an error Output Conditions F value at 5 potential control ON Go to 2 Checking the Printer S...

Page 574: ...d 452 Is the reading of VL1M between 62 and 82 Set the following to 2 through 7 in service mode OPTION BODY CNT W HM A higher setting will make the density higher darker Check the following of the developing assembly system 1 developing bias 2 coating of toner on the sleeve Checking the Density Slope Checking the Solid Black Density YES NO YES NO YES NO NO YES NO YES YES NO Are there vertical line...

Page 575: ... Select COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VDM in service mode Select COPIER DISPLAY DPOT VL1M in service mode A Compare against Nos 6 and 7 halftone of the Test Chart Is the density about the same NO YES Check the potential control system if normal replace the photosensitive drum VD OFST VL OFST Default To make the image lighter To make the image darker DE OFST Default To make the image lighter To make the imag...

Page 576: ... COPIER ADJUST DENS DENS ADJ End YES YES NO NO Make one copy of the A3 Chart in text photo mode YES Go to Checking the Density Slope for the printer side Go to Checking the Solid Black Density for the printer side YES Go to Checking the Halftone Density for the printer side Is there a difference in density between front and rear Executing Potential Control Is gray scale No 1 solid black too low li...

Page 578: ...int free paper Cleaning oil lint free paper Solvent and lint free paper Alcohol lint free paper Moist cloth Alcohol and lint free paper Work Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Cleaning Dust proofing glass Developing assembly mount Dust collecting roller Registration roller Tool solvent Alcohol and lint free paper Lint free paper Alcohol and lint free paper Moist cloth Work Dry wiping the...

Page 579: ...e as indicated Cassette each Front deck left right Manual feed tray Duplexing feeding unit Side paper deck The image margin and the non image width must be as follows on prints made in Direct 1 Adjusting the Image Position Figure 13 A201 Image Leading Edge Margin Figure 13 A202 Left Right Image Margin Figure 13 A204 Left Right Non Image Width Figure 13 A203 Image Leading Edge Non Image Width 1 5mm...

Page 580: ... non image width CCD read start position 4 Image leading edge non image width scanner image leading edge position 2 Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin a Cassette 3 4 1 Remove the two screws 2 and detach the cassette front cover 1 2 Loosen the two fixing screws 3 on the left and right of the cassette then make adjustments using the adjusting screw 4 3 After adjustment be sure to execute COPIER F...

Page 581: ...S A 13 9 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING b Front Deck left right 1 Loosen the four screws 2 and the two fixing screws 3 on the cassette front cover 1 2 Move the cassette guide assembly front 4 to the front or the rear to make adjust ments Figure 13 A207 1 2 2 3 3 2 Figure 13 A208 4 ...

Page 582: ...J REFE A decrease of 23 decreases the margin by 1 mm Increase the setting of ADJ REFE An increase of 23 increases the margin by 1 mm c Manual Feed Tray 1 Loosen the two mounting screws on the manual tray and adjust the position of the manual tray Figure 13 A209 d Duplexing Feeding Unit 2nd side of double sided print 1 Correct the image margin as specified using service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ...

Page 583: ...OUBLESHOOTING Figure 13 A211 Left Rear of the Compartment Screws Latch plate Scale graduations e Side Paper Deck 1 Slide out the compartment and adjust the position of the latch plate of the deck open solenoid using the two screws At this time use the scale graduations on the latch plate as a guide ...

Page 584: ...A decrease of 23 decreases the margin by 1 mm 4 Adjusting the Left Right Non Image Width Figure 13 A213 2 5mm 2 0 Image edge 0 2 4 6 8 10 Decrease the setting of ADJ Y A decrease of 12 decreases the non image width by 1 mm Increase the setting of ADJ Y An increase of 12 increases the image width by 1 mm 1 Set the image margin as specified in service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST Figure 13 A21...

Page 585: ...djusting the Image Leading Figure 13 A214 Image leading edge Decrease the setting of ADJ X A decrease of 12 decreases the non image width by 1 mm Increase the setting of ADJ X An increase of 12 increases the non image width by 1 mm 1 Correct the non image width as specified in service mode COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ X ...

Page 586: ...600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A B Scanner System See Chapter 3 V B Scanner Drive System See Chapter 3 V B Scanner Drive System See Chapter 3 V B Scanner Drive System 1 Replacing the Scanner Drive Cable 2 Adjusting the Scanner Mirror Mount 3 After Replacing the Scanning Lamp ...

Page 587: ...ower plug Caution The copier remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet even after the main power switch is turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug 3 Replace the potential sensor potential control PCB Caution The potential sensor and the potential control PCB are adjusted as a pair Be sure to replace both of them if either of them must be replaced 1 Routing ...

Page 588: ...FY9 3041 to the potential sensor Figure 13 C201 Caution When fitting the tester electrode to the potential sensor take care so that the magnet of the electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover 5 Connect the cable of the potential sensor tester electrode to the support metal plate GND of the potential measurement PCB Caution Be sure not to bring the clip into contact with ...

Page 589: ...h and the control panel power switch 8 Execute COPIER FUNCTION DPC OFST in service mode 9 Record the setting of OFST on the service label 10 Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off and turn off the main power switch 11 Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet 12 Detach the potential sensor tester electrode 13 Connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on t...

Page 590: ...h the follow ing in mind The front and rear pickup rollers are not interchangeable The front pickup roller is identified by its gold collar When mounting the pickup roller 1 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round marking 2 and the round marking 3 on the collar gold are toward the copier s front Figure 13 D201a The rear pickup roller is identified by its silver collar When mounting the rear ...

Page 591: ...e Deck Cassette Pickup Assembly Feeding Roller Figure 13 D203 2 1 4 3 5 front of the copier When replacing the separation roller be sure to orient it as follows Figure 13 D202 When mounting the deck cassette pickup assembly feeding roller be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the copier s front When mounting the feeding roller 3 to the feeding roller shaft 4 be sure that the round marking 5 is ...

Page 592: ... side paper deck pickup roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind The front and rear pickup rollers are not interchangeable The front pickup roller is identified by its silver collar When mounting the pickup roller 1 to the pickup assembly be sure that the round marking 2 on the collar silver is toward the copier s front Figure 13 D204a The rear pickup roller is id...

Page 593: ...y 1 to the manual feed tray pickup assembly be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the copier s front When mounting the feeding roller 3 to the feeding roll shaft 4 be sure that the round marking 5 is toward the copier s front Figure 13 D205 When mounting the feeding roller 1 to the side paper deck pickup assembly be sure that the belt pulley 2 is toward the copier s front When mounting the feed...

Page 594: ...on Roller Figure 13 D207 1 2 3 4 1 Feeding roller 3 Pressure lever 2 Separation roller 4 Pressure spring If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup operation reposition the pressure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the spring into the direction of arrow B If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A ...

Page 595: ...eding or pickup failure occurs during pickup operation reposition the pressure spring of the separation roller If double feeding occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow A If pickup failure occurs move the spring in the direction of arrow B 8 Adjusting the Pressure of the Manual Tray Pickup Feeding Roller Figure 13 D208 ...

Page 596: ...L1 SL 1 SL 2 SL 3 SL 8 SL 7 SL 9 10 SL 4 SL 11 SL 101 Side paper deck 1 8mm Guide Solenoid SL 1 Solenoid SL 2 Solenoid SL 2 10 5 0 5mm Solenoid SL 4 Solenoid SL 3 8 6mm 50 0 5mm 36 0 5mm 34 5 0 5mm No adjustment needed 0 4 0 2mm Solenoid SL 6 SL 6 Push fully A if the fixing cleaning belt is new if the fixing cleaning belt has been in use Solenoid SL 101 Screws Figure 13 D209 ...

Page 597: ...0 PRINTED IN U S A 13 25 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 9 1 Position of the Fixing Inlet Guide Solenoid SL1 1 8mm Guide 1 Solenoid SL1 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 1 so that the guide will lower 1 8 mm when the solenoid turns on Figure 13 D210 ...

Page 598: ...elt is New Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 1 so that the movement of the drive lever will be over a distance of 8 6 mm Figure 13 D211a b If the Fixing Cleaning Belt Has Been in Use Before removing the solenoid take note of the position A of the drive lever when the solenoid is on After replacing the solenoid adjust the position using the screw 1 so that it will be the same as i...

Page 599: ...Feeding Unit Locking Solenoid SL4 10 5 0 5mm Solenoid SL 4 Locking lever 1 Figure 13 D213 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 1 so that the drive lever is fully moved when the solenoid turns on i e the steel core is pulled Figure 13 D212 Adjust the position of the solenoid using the screw 1 so that the locking lever sticks out of the frame by 10 5 0 5 mm when the solenoid turns on ...

Page 600: ...0 PRINTED IN U S A 9 5 Position of the Multifeeder Pickup Latching Solenoid SL6 A 1 2 0 4 0 2mm 0 4 0 2mm Slide the solenoid into the direction of A to adjust so that the gap between the shutter 1 and the shutter plate 2 is 0 4 0 2 mm when the solenoid is pulled Figure 13 D214b Figure 13 D214a ...

Page 601: ...Solenoid SL7 Figure 13 D215 1 1 2 2 A Viewed from A 34 5 0 5mm Adjust pickup solenoid using the screw 1 so that the distance between the bottom face of the pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the support plate is 34 5 0 5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown operated as in 1 and 2 ...

Page 602: ...noid SL8 Figure 13 D216 2 1 1 2 A Viewed from A 50 0 5mm Adjust the pickup solenoid using the screw 1 so that the distance between the bottom face of the pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the roller support plate is 50 0 5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown operated as in 1 and 2 ...

Page 603: ...noid SL9 10 1 2 1 2 A Viewed from A 36 0 5mm Figure 13 D217 Adjust the pickup solenoid using the screw 1 so that the distance between the bottom face of the pickup unit of each holder and the bottom edge of the bushing of the roller support plate is 36 0 5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown operated as in 1 and 2 ...

Page 604: ...k pickup roller releasing solenoid 1 from the support plate keep note of the positions of the two fixing screws 2 of the solenoid with reference to the scale graduations on the support plate or mark the position of the solenoid of itself on the support plate with a scriber If you are mounting the solenoid on its own be sure to secure it in place in its initial position Figure 13 D218 Butt the rack...

Page 605: ...INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 13 33 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Pickup motor Pickup drive belt Main drive belt Main motor Developing waste toner drive belt 11 Routing the Drive Belt Figure 13 D220 ...

Page 606: ... for the 20A model to the left side 4 Connect the fastons of the heater harness at the rear Connect the right side to the main heater and the top side to the sub heater when viewing from the rear Points to Note When Adjusting in the Field The inlet guide must be mounted as shown in the diagram The inlet guide must lower when the solenoid SL1 turns on The inlet guide must be level so that the diffe...

Page 607: ...f the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide Figure 13 E201 Caution You would have to adjust the position of the inlet guide if you removed the inlet guide mount Do not loosen the fixing screw on the inlet guide to avoid adjustment If the fixing screw has been loosened for some reason be sure to tighten it back in reference to the scale graduations on the fixing assembly mount ...

Page 608: ...adjust it using the pressure adjusting nut Figure 13 E202 Caution a and c are points 10 mm from both edges of the paper Taken when the upper and lower rollers have sufficiently been heated Table 13 E201 a Measuring the Nip Width 1 Place A3 copy paper on the manual feed tray 2 Select COPIER FUNCTON FIXING NIP CHK in service mode and discharge the paper A3 copy paper will be picked up and discharged...

Page 609: ... The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet even after the main power switch has been turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug 3 Replace the laser unit 4 Take notes of the values recorded on the label LA PWR A B LA DELAY of the new laser unit 5 After mounting connect the power plug and turn on the main power switch and the control panel power swit...

Page 610: ... make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off and turn off the main power switch 2 Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet 3 Remove the image processor cover according to the instructions in the following Chapter 4 IV B Removing the Image Processor PCB Figure 13 F201 4 Open the laser power checker inlet cover Figure 13 F202 5 Shift the switch on the laser power checker FY9 4008...

Page 611: ... 10 A COM mA uA 10A mA 0 2 4 2 RE L AV G SELECT RA NG E MIN MAX DATA H 4 mV mV 0 Hz rpm AD P K C V V Hz CU uA FU SE D FU SE D 1000V MA X TRUE RM S 0 1 V Hz Digital multimeter Light receiving face Laser power checker Figure 13 F204 6 Orient the light receiving face of the laser power checker as shown and insert it Figure 13 F203 7 Insert the lead wire of the laser power checker into the digital mul...

Page 612: ...l power soft switch 9 Select COPIER FUNCTION LASER in service mode 10 Select POWER A and press the OK key 11 Check to see if the reading of the digital multimeter is between 6 and 8 mV so that the power of the laser A is at a correct level 12 Select POWER B and press the OK key 13 Check to see if the reading of the digital multimeter is between 6 and 8 mV so that the power of the laser B is at a c...

Page 613: ...aution The copier remains powered as long as it is connected to the power outlet even after the main power switch has been turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug 3 Replace the CCD unit 4 After mounting connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the main power switch and the control panel power switch 5 Execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ in service mode 6 Record the new values...

Page 614: ...n turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug 5 Replace the image processor PCB 6 Take notes of the values IP DELAY recorded on the new image processor PCB Figure 13 G201 7 After mounting connect the power plug and turn on the main power switch and the control panel power switch 8 Execute COPIER FUNCTION CLEANER IP in service mode 9 Turn off and then on the main power switch and turn on the co...

Page 615: ...tlet Caution The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet even after the main power switch has been turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug 5 Replace the MFC PCB 6 Check to make sure that the setting of the DIP switch on the new MFC PCB is the same as the DIP switch on the removed MFC PCB 7 After mounting connect the power plug to the power outlet ...

Page 616: ...ms 4 Check to make sure that the data lamp on the control panel is off and turn off the main power switch 5 Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet Caution The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet even after the main switch has been turned off Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the power outlet 6 Replace the hard disk 7 After mounting co...

Page 617: ...ty control or developing bias control mechanism is faulty non auto control mode hereafter Non auto control mode further may be used as an emergency measure in response to a fault in any of the auto control mechanisms Keep in mind that each output in non auto control will be fixed to its standard setting 1 Steps 1 Select COPIER OPTION BODY PO CNT in service mode then enter 0 and press the OK key 2 ...

Page 618: ...processor is reading 0 V when the surface potential of the drum is 0 V A zero level check enables a check on the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB and the measuring unit and it may be either of the following two ways method 1 enables a check on the level shift circuit on the DC controller PCB while method 2 enables a check on the potential measurement circuit 1 Method 1 1 Turn off the power ...

Page 619: ...ial rotation is between 0 and 30 If the reading is not between 0 and 30 the DC controller PCB may be faulty 5 Turn off the power switch and detach the door switch actuator 6 Remove the door switch actuator 6 Detach the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB 7 Connect the connector to J3 on the potential control circuit 8 Turn on the power switch 2 Method 2 1 Turn off the power switch 2 Remove the ...

Page 620: ...INTED IN U S A Potential sensor support plate Screws Connectors Potential sensor support plate 4 Remove the two screws and replace the potential sensor support plate Figure 13 G204 5 Put back the developing assembly and the process unit 6 Connect the connector of the potential sensor Figure 13 G205 ...

Page 621: ...Y9 3041 to the potential sensor Caution When attaching the tester electrode to the potential sensor take care so that the magnet on the meter electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover Figure 13 G206 8 Connect the cable of the potential sensor tester electrode to the support metal plate GND of the potential measurement PCB Caution Be sure never to bring the clip into cont...

Page 622: ...tial rotation is between 0 and 30 Reference 1 If the result in method 1 is as indicated and the result in method 2 is not as indicated suspect dirt on the sensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit 2 If the results in method 1 and method 2 are as indicated assume that the signal path from the potential sensor unit to the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB is normal and the operation ...

Page 623: ...ART NO YES NO YES YES NO Turn on the power switch Replace the DC controller PCB NO Checking the Laser Output A YES Replace the photosensitive drum If the problem is not corrected check the laser output Turn off potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PO CN T 0 END Select the following in service mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS PRIARY current of primary charging assembly Convert the reading in µA taken dur...

Page 624: ...re the voltage TR CNT during copying at J510A 6 on the DC controller PCB 1 Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage 2 Change the setting of the following in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY FUZZY 3 Try replacing copy paper Select the following in service mode COPIER DISPLAY HV STS TR Convert the reading µA taken during copying into a control voltage USING Replace the DC controller PCB Repla...

Page 625: ...oping bias V 0 3 7 11 15 18 22 26 30 33 37 41 45 48 52 56 60 63 67 71 75 78 82 86 90 93 97 101 105 108 112 116 120 123 127 131 135 138 142 146 Pre transfer µA 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55 57 59 61 63 66 68 70 72 74 76 78 80 Transfer µA 440 437 434 431 429 426 426 420 418 415 412 409 407 404 401 398 396 393 390 387 385 382 379 376 374 371 368 365 36...

Page 626: ...5 1 006 997 938 980 971 962 953 945 936 927 918 910 901 892 883 875 866 857 848 840 831 822 813 805 796 787 778 770 761 752 743 735 726 717 708 Developing bias V 150 153 157 161 165 168 172 176 180 183 187 191 195 198 202 206 210 213 217 221 225 228 232 236 240 243 247 251 255 258 262 266 270 273 277 281 285 288 292 296 Separation µA 50 53 57 61 65 68 72 76 80 83 87 91 95 98 102 106 110 113 117 12...

Page 627: ...veloping bias V 300 303 307 311 315 318 322 326 330 333 337 341 345 348 352 356 360 363 367 371 375 378 382 386 390 393 397 401 405 408 412 416 420 423 427 431 435 438 442 446 Pre transfer µA 165 167 169 171 173 175 177 179 181 183 185 187 189 191 193 195 198 200 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 218 220 222 224 226 228 231 233 235 237 239 241 243 245 Separation µA 200 203 207 211 215 218 222 226 23...

Page 628: ...2 43 35 26 17 8 0 Developing bias V 450 453 457 461 465 468 472 476 480 483 487 491 495 498 502 506 510 513 517 521 525 528 532 536 540 543 547 551 555 558 562 566 570 573 577 581 585 588 592 596 600 Pre transfer µA 247 249 251 253 255 257 259 261 264 266 268 270 272 274 276 278 280 282 284 286 288 290 292 294 297 299 301 303 305 307 309 311 313 315 317 319 321 323 325 327 330 Transfer µA 110 107 ...

Page 629: ...copier alone for 5 min 5 Select COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG in service mode then check and record the tempera ture and the humidity on the control panel data B RTMP C data B1 RHUM data B2 6 Compare data A and data B The difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 5 The difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 20 If the difference between data A and data B is not as indicated replace the environment s...

Page 630: ... service mode a Using a Meter 1 Set the meter range to 30 VDC 2 Connect the probe of the meter to GND of the DC controller PCB 3 Connect the probe of the meter to the terminals indicated DC controller PCB 4 Make checks as indicated b Using Service Mode 1 Select COPIER I O in service mode and check the appropriate addresses Caution Take care Turning on off a sensor can start a motor or the like 10 ...

Page 631: ...C J508 A11 PC J519 B6 PC J519 B7 PC 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 5V 0V 5V 0V 5V 0V 5V 0V 0V 5V 0V 5V 5V 0V 5V 0V 5V 0V 5V 0V 0V 5V 5V 0V The light blocking plate is at PS1 The light blocking plate is not at PS1 When the light blocking plate is at PS3 When the light blocking plate is not at PS3 The cover is closed The cover is opened Paper is not over PS5 Paper is over PS5 Paper ...

Page 632: ... 5V 0V 5V 0V 5V Paper is inserted Paper is inserted Paper is removed Paper is removed Paper is inserted Paper is inserted Paper is removed Paper is removed The light blocking plate is not at PS18 The light blocking plate is at PS18 Paper is inserted Paper is removed The light detecting plate is at PS21 The light detecting plate is at PS20 The light detecting plate is not at PS20 The light detectin...

Page 633: ...ht detecting plate is not at PS31 The light detecting plate is at PS32 The light detecting plate is at PS33 The light detecting plate is not at PS32 The light detecting plate is not at PS33 The light detecting plate is at PS34 The light detecting plate is not at PS34 The light detecting plate is at PS35 The light detecting plate is not at PS35 The light detecting plate is at PS38 The light detecti...

Page 634: ...ng plate is at PS46 The light detecting plate is not at PS46 The light detecting plate is at PS47 The light detecting plate is not at PS47 The light detecting plate is at PS48 The light detecting plate is not at PS48 The light detecting plate is at PS49 The light detecting plate is not at 49 The light detecting plate is at PS51 The light detecting plate is not at PS51 The light detecting plate is ...

Page 635: ...d to direct sunlight If needed provide curtains e The copier must be in a well ventilated place f The copier must remain level g The copier must remain powered throughout the night Check the site against the above conditions 2 Checking the Originals Find out whether the problem is due to originals or to the copier a The copy density is normally at 5 1 b Reddish originals tend to produce copies wit...

Page 636: ...embly are in contact with the drum b Check the surface of the developing cylinder to make sure that there is an even coating of toner 6 Checking Papers a Is the paper of a type recommended by Canon b Is the paper moist Try paper fresh out of package 7 Checking the Periodically Replace Parts Check the parts against the Scheduled Servicing Chart and the Table of Periodically Replaced Parts to find o...

Page 639: ...tment Basic Procedure Is the problem corrected Does the problem occur on copy images only Make copies in AE mode Is the density correct Are the rolls of the developing assembly in contact with the drum Action End The cause is between the scanner and the CCD 1 Check the standard white plate for dirt 2 Execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ in service mode End Check to see if the developing assembly pr...

Page 640: ...e charging assembly securely Cause Copy paper Transfer faults Pre transfer charging assembly Checks Try copy paper fresh out of package Is the problem corrected Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure Is the problem corrected Turn off the power switch in the middle of copying operation and open the front cover At this time is the toner image on the surface of the photosensitive drum before tr...

Page 641: ...loping assembly locking unit End 1 Replace the pre exposure lamp 2 Replace the DC controller PCB 1 Clean the edge of the blade of the developing assembly dry wiping 2 Clean the surface of the developing cylinder 3 Check to see if the toner inside the developing assembly is even 1 Clean all charging wires once again and check the position of the charging wires 2 Try replacing copy paper 3 Check the...

Page 642: ...ly 1 Replace the pre exposure lamp 2 Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the developing rolls Replace the developing cylinder Checks Perform the Image Adjustment Basic Procedure Is the problem corrected Does the problem occur in copy images only Set the following to 0 in service mode and turn off the potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PC CNT Is the problem corrected Is the cleaning blade mount...

Page 643: ...Check the drum cleaner unit Checks Does the problem occur in copy images only Set the setting of the following in service mode to 0 and turn off potential control COPIER OPTION BODY PC CNT Is the problem corrected Clean the primary charging wire grid wire an shielding plate Is the problem corrected Is the light of the pre exposure lamp even during copying operation Clean the pre exposure lamp Is t...

Page 644: ...tched replace the blade Replace the photosensitive drum If scratches are found find out the cause Check the developing assembly Checks Does the problem occur in copy images only Using the door switch actuator press the Copy Start key while keeping the front cover open Turn off the power switch while copy paper is in the feeding assembly and check the image Is the copy image normal Clean the primar...

Page 645: ...e setting of the following in service mode COPIER OPTOIN BODY FUZZY Checks Try copy paper fresh out of package Is the problem corrected Clean the dust proofing glass Is the problem corrected Does the problem occur in copy images only Are there scratches in the peripheral direction of the photosensitive drum corresponding to the problem in the image Is the toner on the developing cylinder in an eve...

Page 646: ...ive drum Yes No YES YES YES YES NO YES Cause Developing assembly Drum Copy paper Scanner rail Scanner cable Charging wire dirt Photosensitive drum Action 1 Clean the developing rolls 2 Dry wipe the surface of the developing cylinder 3 If scratches are found on the surface of the developing cylinder replace the developing cylinder 1 Clean the drum 2 If scratches are found on the drum replace the dr...

Page 647: ... 2 Check the drum cleaning assembly for leakage of waste toner 1 Clean the fixing assembly lower roller 2 Clean the fixing assembly inlet guide 3 Check the fixing upper roller and the cleaning belt Check the following 1 registration roller for dirt 2 delivery roller and separation claw for dirt Checks Is the transfer guide soiled with toner Is the paper feeding assembly soiled with toner Is the fi...

Page 648: ...t the icon of the selected cassette as the thick paper icon 2nd column from right 3rd from the top Thick paper icon 3 Be sure to set all thick paper in the selected cassette in the future Try recommended paper If the results are good ask the user to use recommended paper Check the fixing assembly for scratches and dirt Check the nip of the fixing roller Checks Is the paper thick paper or otherwise...

Page 649: ...t 1 each roller for the end of life 2 each roller for soiling by paper lint 3 paper path for dirt 1 Check the registration roller for deformation 2 Check the registration roller drive system End Checks Is the original set properly Make copies using the following source of paper Is the displacement different among copies 1 Left right front deck 2 Each cassette 3 Side paper deck 4 Duplexing feeding ...

Page 650: ...eck the developing assembly Check the cleaner assembly Check the drum drive system Checks Is the cable on the cable pulley overlapping while the scanner is moving Further is the cable too loose or too taut Move the No 1 mirror mount slowly by hand Does the No 1 mirror mount move smoothly Does the problem occur at intervals of about 340 mm Does the problem occur at intervals of about 4 mm Does the ...

Page 651: ...or Scanner Feeding system Action Go to step 3 Check the scanning lamp and the lamp regulator Check the scanner system Check the feeding system Cause Copyboard glass Mirror position Scanner dirt Photosensitive drum Lens drive assembly Step 1 2 3 4 Action Clean the copyboard glass Adjust the distance between No 1 mirror and the No 2 mirror End End Check the operation of the lens drive assembly Check...

Page 652: ...it and the relay PCB if normal replace the CCD unit 1 Replace the laser unit 2 Replace the image processor PCB Replace the drum unit Checks Is the developing assembly locked to the photosensitive drum during copying operation Is the developing assembly rotating during copying operation Is the transfer charging assembly fully inserted Is leakage noted in the transfer charging assembly Is the voltag...

Page 653: ...embly Correct the connection 1 Replace the image processor PCB 2 Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the CCD unit Checks Is the scanning lamp on Select COPIER DISPLAY DPOT in service mode Is the setting of VDM between 432 and 452 Is the connection of the following normal 1 Image processor PCB 2 CCD unit 3 DC control PCB 4 Relay PCB Does the problem occur in copy images only Cause Scanning lamp P...

Page 654: ...rmistor surface for dirt connection Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the heater Check the wiring if normal replace the SSR Checks Clear E000 and turn off and then on the power switch Select COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG Does either FIX C or FIX E indicate a rise in temperature Turn off the power switch and cool the upper fixing roller sufficiently then turn on the power switch Clear E000 and turn off...

Page 655: ... 5 6 Action See the descriptions for the item in question Correct the connections Mount the thermistor properly End End End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Turn on the power switch and clear E002 E003 then turn off and then on the power switch Is any of the following true The fixing heater fails to operate E002 or E003 is indicated Is the contact of the connector on the DC controller PCB and ...

Page 656: ... belt of the fixing assembly been taken up Is the position of the cleaning belt detection lever correct Is the cleaning belt sensor PS7 normal See the instructions on how to check photointerrupters Yes No YES NO YES NO Cause Cleaning belt Cleaning belt detecting lever DC controller PCB Sensor 7 E010 Step 1 2 Action Connect the connector Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the main motor Checks I...

Page 657: ...he voltage of the connector of the drum motor when the power switch is turned on Is it as follows J601 1 38 V Yes No NO NO NO YES Cause Connector DC controller PCB Relay PCB Drum motor M0 9 E013 Step 1 2 Action It is most likely that the feeding screw inside the waste toner pipe is prevented from rotating for some reason Remove the waste toner pipe and try turning the screw by hand If it can be tu...

Page 658: ...kup motor connected Does the voltage between J513 A3 and J513 A1 on the DC controller PCB change from 0 to about 5 V when the Copy Start key is pressed Yes No NO NO YES Cause DC controller PCB Pickup motor M2 12 E019 Step 1 2 3 4 Action Dispose of the waste toner Correct the movement Connect the connector securely Check the connection of the cable up to the DC controller PCB if normal replace the ...

Page 659: ... cover of the developing assembly Is there toner inside the developing assembly Select COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK in service mode and check the operation of the hopper drive clutch CL1 Does the clutch operate Check the operation of the hopper motor M18 using MTR Does the motor operate Yes No YES NO NO YES Cause Toner feed screw Toner sensor TS3 Hopper drive clutch CL1 14 E025 Step 1 2 Action Connect...

Page 660: ...he wiring from the DC controller PCB to the total copy counter if normal replace the total copy counter Replace the total copy counter Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Turn off the power switch and disconnect J503 of the DC controller PCB Set the meter range to 1KW and measure the resistance between J503 B14 and J503 B15 Is it about 500W Connect J503 to the DC controller PCB and turn on the po...

Page 661: ...Action Replace the sensor Replace the horizontal registration motor M15 Mount it properly End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Is the horizontal home positions sensor PS18 normal Disconnect J3603 of the no stacking feed driver PCB Is there electrical continuity between the following pins of the motor side J3603 B4 and B5 and B3 J3603 B2 and B6 and B1 Is the manual tray cover open closed detect...

Page 662: ...harging wire cleaner home position detecting switch MSW4 Primary charging wire cleaner motor M8 DC controller PCB 21 E063 Step 1 2 3 4 Action Connect the connectors securely Connect the connector securely If normal replace the detecting switch End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Are the connectors of the transfer separation charging assembly connected securely Is the connector J509 on the DC ...

Page 663: ... the primary charging assembly soiled with paper lint or the like Is the primary charging assembly mounted properly Is the contact of the primary charging assembly soiled or in any way faulty Is the connection of the following on the HV DC PCB correct See Figure 13 401 T601 J723 J730 Is the wiring from the HV DC PCB to the primary charging assembly normal Yes No YES NO NO NO NO YES Cause Primary c...

Page 664: ... pre transfer charging assembly connected securely Is the connector J504 on the DC controller PCB connected securely Is the mounting of the pre transfer charging wire cleaner home position detecting switch and the connection of the cable normal Replace the pre transfer charging wire cleaner motor M7 Is the problem corrected Yes No NO NO NO YES NO Cause Connector Connector Pre transfer charging wir...

Page 665: ...imary charging assembly pre transfer charging assembly and transfer separation charging assembly mounted correctly Are the following connectors and screws on the HV DC PCB normal See Figure 13 402 J721 J723 J730 Is the wiring from the HV DC PCB to each charging assembly and from the HV AC PCB to each charging assembly normal Disconnect J722 of the HV DC PCB and make a copy Is E067 indicated Yes No...

Page 666: ...embly Replace the HV AC PCB Checks Is the transfer separation charging assembly mounted correctly Are the following connectors and screws of the HV DC PCB and the HV AC PCB normal See Figure 13 403 Disconnect T1 S from the transformer of the HV AC PCB and make a copy Is E068 indicated See Figure 13 404 Disconnect T1 Q from the transformer of the HV AC PCB and make a copy Is E068 indicated See Figu...

Page 667: ...sembly End Checks Is the transfer separation charging assembly mounted properly Are the following connectors and screws of the HV DC PCB normal J701 J723 J730 Is the connection of and the wiring from the HV DC PCB to the transfer separation charging assembly transfer charging assembly side normal Replace the HV DC PCB Is the problem corrected Yes No NO NO NO NO YES Cause Mounting Connection Wiring...

Page 668: ...CB and the IP PCB and the position of the BD PCB if normal replace the BD PCB Check the following laser output foreign matter in the laser path Replace the image processor PCB Checks Select COPIER DISPLAY DPOT in service mode Is the reading of VLIM between 62 and 82 Is the reading of VDM between 432 and 452 Yes No YES YES NO Cause BD PCB Laser output Image processor PCB ...

Page 669: ...er supply PCB to the relay PCB if normal replace the relay PCB Replace the laser unit Correct the connection Checks Is the voltage of the following terminals on the relay PCB as indicated J1714 1 5 V J1714 3 8 V J1714 5 8 V Is the connection from the relay PCB to the laser driver PCB normal Yes No NO YES NO Cause Relay PCB Laser unit 30 E111 Step 1 2 3 Action Remove the foreign matter Connect the ...

Page 670: ...Connect the connector securely End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Is there foreign matter that hinders the rotation of the laser driver cooling fan Is the connector J503 on the DC controller PCB connected securely Replace the laser driver cooling fan FM5 Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO NO YES Cause Foreign matter Connector Laser driver cooling fan FM5 DC controller PCB 32 E202 Step 1 ...

Page 671: ...nect the connectors securely End End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Are the connectors J852 J853 on the light intensity control PCB connected securely Replace the fluorescent lamp heater Is the problem corrected Replace the light intensity PCB Is the problem corrected Yes No NO YES YES NO Cause Connector Fluorescent lamp heater Light intensity control PCB DC controller PBC 38 E220 37 E219 36...

Page 672: ... the DC controller PCB Checks Turn off and on the power switch Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO Cause DC controller PCB 42 E241 Step 1 2 Action Mount the PCB correctly End Replace the image processor PCB Checks Is the original orientation detection PCB mounted correctly Replace the original orientation detection PCB Is the problem corrected Yes No NO YES NO Cause Original orientation PCB Ori...

Page 673: ... Is the connection of the connectors of the CCD PCB J1502 and the image processor PCB J1105 secure Replace the CCD PCB Is the problem corrected Yes No NO YES NO Cause Connector CCD PCB Image processor PCB 45 E302 Step 1 2 3 4 5 Action Connect the connectors securely Correct the problem End End End Replace the MFC PCB Checks Is the connection of the connectors of the page memory PCB and the image p...

Page 674: ...tween the system motherboard and the MFC PCB normal Replace the system motherboard Is the problem corrected Yes No NO NO YES NO Cause Connector Connector System mother board MFC PCB 51 E711 Step 1 Checks Turn off and then on the power switch Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO Cause Malfunction DC controller PCB 50 E710 52 E712 Step 1 2 3 Action End Replace the DC controller PCB End Replace the...

Page 675: ...e Remote diagnostic device II connected securely Replace the copy data controller or the Remote diagnostic device II Is the problem corrected Yes No NO YES NO Cause Connector Copy data controller Remote diagnostic device II DC controller PCB 55 E800 Step 1 2 3 Action End Connect the connector securely Replace the power switch SW1 Check the wiring from the DC controller PCB to the power switch SW1 ...

Page 676: ...oreign matter Connect the connector securely End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Is there foreign matter that hinders the rotation of the fixing heat discharge fan Is the connector J503 on the DC controller PCB connected securely Replace the fixing heat discharge fan FM2 Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO NO YES Cause Foreign matter Connector Fixing heat discharge fan FM2 DC controller PC...

Page 677: ...lace the primary charging assembly fan FM1 Is the problem corrected Yes No YES NO NO YES Cause Foreign matter Connector Primary charging assembly fan FM1 DC controller PCB 61 E830 Step 1 2 3 Action Remove the foreign matter Connect the connector securely End Replace the DC controller PCB Checks Is there foreign matter that hinders the rotation of the separation fan Is the connector J509 on the DC ...

Page 678: ...k the AC power line for wiring and the connector for poor contact Checks Is the power plug connected to the power outlet securely Is the rated AC voltage present at the power outlet Remove the rear cover Has the leakage breaker mounted on the power cord mount turned on i e the switch is at Replace the power or and the line filter LF1 Is there AC power Connect the meter probes to both terminals of ...

Page 679: ...r and the DC loads Replace the DC power supply PCB Checks Is the main power lamp on Is there the rated voltage between J28 1 and J28 5 and between J28 2 and J28 7 on the DC power supply PCB Is the connection of the cable for the connector J1701 4 for overcurrent detection signal 1 on the relay PCB normal Is the fuse FU101 on the DC power supply PCB blown Turn off the main power supply switch When ...

Page 680: ... power supply PCB Checks Is the main power lamp on Is the connection of the connectors of the following PCBs normal Relay PCB J1718 DC controller PCB J501 J525 MFC PCB J1402 J1403 J1407 Image Processor PCB J1101 J1102 J1103 Turn off the main power such Is there DC power when the power switch is turned on in about 3 min and the control panel power switch is turned on Yes No NO NO Cause Connector Co...

Page 681: ...ers 1 2 3 and 4 and the pre registant roller rotate when power is put over the cover open closed sensor and the Copy Start key is pressed Is the leading edge of the copy paper as far as the registration roller assembly Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover Does the feeding separation roller rotate when a screwdriver is inserted into the door switch and the Copy Start key is pressed ...

Page 682: ...up the pickup roller releasing lever with your finger Doe the pickup roller move down Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 5 V when the deck is inserted right deck PS23 J511 B5 left deck PS33 J518 B2 Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 0 V right deck PS24 J511 B8 left deck PS34 J518 B5 Turn on the main power switch and the ...

Page 683: ...play Is the movement of the open button on the cassette normal Push down the pickup roller releasing lever with your finger Does the pickup roller move down Is the voltage of the following connectors on the DC controller PCB about 5 V when the cassette is slid in cassette 3 PS40 J515 B5 cassette 4 PS45 J517 B5 Turn on the main power switch and the control panel power switch Set the meter to the 30...

Page 684: ... of the copy paper as far as the registration roller Are the pickup roller pickup feeding roller and separation roller mounted in their correct orientation Execute the following service mode and place paper in the multifeeder Does the bit change from 0 to 1 bit 0 of COPIER I O IP POC1 Execute the following in service mode Is the sound of the clutch CL7 operating heard COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL1 ...

Page 685: ...the sound of the clutch CL13 operating heard COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL3 Execute the following service mode Is the sound of the clutch CL15 operating heard COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK CL5 Yes No NO NO NO NO NO YES Cause Belt Gear Coupling Vertical path 1 clutch Vertical path 2 clutch Vertical path 3 clutch Vertical path 4 clutch DC controller PCB 70 The registration roller fails to rotate Step 1 2 3...

Page 686: ...replace the DC controller PCB End Replace the scanner motor M5 Checks Is the copyboard glass mounted correctly Measure the voltage of J804 2 on the scanner motor driver PCB Is it 5 V when the copyboard glass is mounted Is it 0 V when the copyboard glass is removed Is the scanner drive cable routed correctly Is the scanner rail free of dirt and does the scanner move smoothly when pushed by hand Mea...

Page 687: ...tart key is pressed Yes No YES NO YES Cause Pre exposure lamp PCB DC controller PCB Pre exposure lamp PCB 73 The scanning lamp fails to turn on Step 1 2 3 4 Action Check the connector It may have poor contact Disconnect the power plug and mount the lamp correctly Check the AC line up to the relay PCB if normal replace the relay PCB Check the wring if normal replace the inverter PCB Check the wirin...

Page 688: ...ode Does the hopper inside toner feeder motor rotate Execute COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR in service mode to operate the hopper inside toner feeder motor Is the voltage between J504 B18 and J504 B19 on the DC controller PCB about 24 V Yes No NO NO YES Cause DC controller PCB J138 143 76 The drum heater fails to operate Step 1 2 3 4 Action The drum heater is normal Replace the DC controller PCB End...

Page 689: ...troller PCB Control panel 78 The Add Toner fails to turn on Step 1 2 Action The toner inside the hopper is not enough Supply toner 1 Replace the toner sensor inside the hopper 1 Replace the DC controller PCB 2 Replace the control panel Checks Is there toner at the rear of the hopper Select COPIER I O IP in service mode At this time is bit 9 of P002 0 toner absent Yes No NO YES NO Cause Toner Toner...

Page 690: ...the flag properly Checks Is the deck paper sensor mounted correctly and is the movement of the sensor flag normal Yes No NO Cause Deck paper sensor PS22 for right PS32 for left 82 The Add Paper message fails to turn off cassette 3 4 Step 1 2 Action Mount the sensor and the flag properly Mount the lifter motor properly Or replace the lifter motor and the cassette pickup assembly simultaneously Chec...

Page 691: ...sor mounted properly Is the fixing feeding unit releasing lever sensor mounted properly Slide out the fixing assembly and connect the meter probes to both terminals of the thermal switch TP1 Is there electrical continuity Replace the relay RLY1 Is the problem corrected Slide out the fixing assembly and connect the meter probes to both terminals of the fixing heater H1 H2 Is there electrical contin...

Page 692: ... closed firmly Slide out the compartment from the deck Does the lifter move down Further is the lifter heard to move up when the compartment is slid in Does the pickup roller rotate Is the belt used to transmit the drive to the pickup roller routed correctly Is the drive from the deck main motor transmitted to the pickup assembly through the drive belt gear and coupling Measure the voltage of the ...

Page 693: ...iver PCB Checks Is the deck installed correctly Is the lifter cable routed correctly Push up the pickup roller releasing lever by your finger Does the pickup roller move down Does the deck lifter motor rotate Does the voltage between J109 3 on the side deck driver PCB and GND change from about 0 to 5 V when the deck is closed Does the voltage between J107 8 on the side deck driver PCB and GND chan...

Page 694: ... the following blocks of the copier 1 Pickup assembly 2 Separation feeding assembly 3 Fixing delivery assembly 4 Drum cleaner unit 5 Reversing assembly 6 Duplexing feeding assembly The troubleshooting procedures that follow are organized according to location The copier is designed to indicate the location and type of each jam in its service mode COPIER DISPLAY JAM Figure 13 501 1 2 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 695: ...See Pickup operation fails for each source of paper Replace the pickup roller Check the guide plate for deformation Checks Is the copy paper curled or wavy Try paper of a type recommended by Canon Is the problem corrected Does the pickup roller of the selected cassette deck or manual feed tray rotate during copying operation Is the pickup roller deformed or worn Yes No YES YES NO YES NO Cause Pick...

Page 696: ... Is the leading edge of copy paper past the registration roller Is the coupling of the registration roller connected properly Is the registration roller deformed worn or soiled Are the roller retaining springs on both ends of the registration roller mounted correctly Does the registration clutch operate normally Is the transfer separation charging assembly set securely Are there burrs on the paper...

Page 697: ...m sensor PS6 normal Is the delivery paper deflecting plate oriented in the direction of delivery Does the delivery roller move smoothly Yes No YES YES YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES Cause Separation claw delivery assembly Leading edge margin Upper lower roller Paper guide Nip Cleaning belt Sensor lever Delivery sensor Delivery paper deflecting plate Delivery roller drive assembly 4 Fixing Delivery A...

Page 698: ...ndicated Is the separation claw under the cleaner unit damaged Try paper of a type recommended by Canon Yes No NO NO YES YES NO Cause Transfer separation charging assembly Pre transfer charging assembly Separation claw cleaner unit Copy paper High voltage transformer DC controller PCB 6 Lower Feeding Assembly Step 1 2 3 Action Set the assembly correctly Replace CL16 or CL17 Replace PS14 or PS15 Ch...

Page 699: ... Advise the user to use recommended paper Clean it with solvent Adjust the height Adjust the pressure Try replacing the upper and lower rollers one after the other Checks Turn off the power while copy paper is moving through the feeding assembly At this time is the copy paper wrinkled Or is it moving askew Try paper fresh out of package Is the problem corrected Try paper recommended by Canon Is th...

Page 700: ...4 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A VI ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS A Clutches Figure 13 601 CL18 CL7 CL5 CL6 CL1 CL4 CL9 CL2 CL17 CL16 CL19 CL14 CL15 CL13 CL12 CL8 CL10 CL11 CL21 CL3 ...

Page 701: ...tical path 1 roller Drives the vertical path 2 roller Drives the front deck right pickup roller Drives the front deck left pickup roller Drives the cassette 3 pickup roller Drives the vertical path 3 roller Drives the cassette 4 pickup roller Drives the vertical path 4 roller Drives the lower feeding middle roller Drives the lower feeding right roller Drives the manual feed tray feeding roller Dri...

Page 702: ...CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 126 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A B Solenoids Figure 13 602 SL9 SL10 SL7 SL8 SL6 SL11 SL3 SL4 SL2 SL1 ...

Page 703: ... cleaning belt Drives the delivery flapper Locks the fixing feeding unit Drives the manual feed tray pickup latch Drives the front deck right pickup mechanism Drives the front deck left pickup mechanism Drives the cassette 3 pickup mechanism Drives the cassette 4 pickup mechanism Drives the reversing flapper Symbol Name Solenoid Notation SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL6 SL7 SL8 SL9 SL10 SL11 SL ...

Page 704: ...CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 128 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A C Motors Figure 13 603 M6 M5 M18 M4 M0 M1 M2 M13 M14 M3 M11 M12 M16 M17 M7 M8 M9 M15 ...

Page 705: ...tor Pre transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor Transfer separation charging wire cleaner motor Reversal motor Duplexing feeding motor Front deck right lifter motor Front deck left lifter motor Horizontal registration motor Cassette 3 lifter motor Cassette 4 lifter motor Hopper inside toner feeder motor Symbol Name Motor Notation M0 M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M11 M...

Page 706: ...CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 130 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A D Fans Figure 13 604 FM8 FM5 FM9 FM2 FM13 FM7 FM4 FM10 FM3 FM14 FM1 FM6 FM11 FM12 ...

Page 707: ...ixing assembly heat discharge fan Scanner cooling fan Stream reading fan Laser driver cooling fan De curling fan Feeding fan Drum fan Inverter cooling fan Pre transfer charging assembly fan Power supply cooling fan 1 Power supply cooling fan 2 Separation fan Laser scanner fan Symbol Name Fans Notation FM1 FM2 FM3 FM4 FM5 FM6 FM7 FM8 FM9 FM10 FM11 FM12 FM13 FM14 ...

Page 708: ...RINTED IN U S A E Sensors 1 Figure 13 605 PS47 PS59 PS35 PS12 PS5 PS13 PS8 PS34 PS7 PS31 PS10 PS32 PS9 PS33 PS6 PS25 PS11 PS26 PS16 PS14 PS52 PS24 PS51 PS21 PS55 PS22 PS54 PS23 PS49 PS20 PS41 PS27 PS37 PS15 PS28 PS38 PS39 PS17 PS40 PS46 PS48 PS42 PS58 PS45 PS56 PS44 PS43 PS19 PS1 PS4 PS3 PS57 PS18 ...

Page 709: ...ck left lifter position detection Front deck left paper detection Front deck left open closed detection Front deck left lifter upper limit detection Manual feed tray de curling inlet paper detection Cassette 3 pickup paper detection Cassette 3 lifter position detection Cassette 3 paper detection Cassette 3 open closed detection Vertical path 3 roller paper detection Cassette 4 pickup paper detecti...

Page 710: ...CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 134 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A F Sensors 2 Figure 13 606 TS2 TS3 TS1 SIZE2 SIZE1 SVR1 DP1 SIZE4 SIZE3 SVR2 SV1 SVR3 SV2 ...

Page 711: ...l measurement Cassette 3 paper length detection Cassette 4 paper length detection Original size detection 1 Original size detection 2 Original size detection 3 Original size detection 4 Manual feed tray paper width detection Cassette 3 paper width detection Cassette 4 paper width detection Symbol Name Piezoelectric oscillator Potential sensor Photointerrupter Reflecting type sensor Slide registrat...

Page 712: ...CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 136 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A G Switches Figure 13 607 MSW5 MSW3 MSW4 MSW6 SW1 MSW1 SW3 MSW8 SW2 MSW2 MSW7 ...

Page 713: ... detection Waste toner clogging detection Pre transfer charging wire cleaner home position detection Primary charging wire cleaner home position detection Manual feed tray cover open closed detection Transfer separation charging wire cleaner home position detection Front cover open closed detection Cartridge motor drive Name Switch Notation SW1 SW2 SW3 MSW1 MSW2 MSW3 MSW4 MSW5 MSW6 MSW7 MSW8 ...

Page 714: ...HOOTING 13 138 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A H Counters Heaters Fuses and Others Figure 13 608 ELCB1 FL1 LF1 LED1 RL1 H5 SSR1 H3 HD1 H4 TH1 CNT2 TH2 CNT3 TP1 CNT1 H1 H2 RL2 ...

Page 715: ...tandard with 100 V Scanning lamp heater Fixing heater main thermistor Fixing heater sub thermistor end part Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker AC power supply noise removal Fixing heater power supply Drum heater cassette heater power supply Drum pre exposure Hard disk memory Name Counter SSR Scanning lamp fluorescent lamp Heater Thermistor Thermal switch Leakage breaker Line filter Relay...

Page 716: ...3 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 140 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A I PCBs Figure 13 609 11 27 32 17 12 9 33 20 6 7 30 19 4 8 31 23 5 1 29 15 22 2 26 10 24 3 16 14 25 28 18 13 ...

Page 717: ...amp intensity control Fluorescent lamp intensity detection Original orientation detection Control panel control Control panel key input LED indication Control panel power switch Control panel contrast adjustment Notation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Name CCD PCB Image processor PCB Page memory PCB MFC PCB System motherboard DC controller PC...

Page 718: ...13 142 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A J Side Paper Deck 1 Sensors and Switches Figure 13 610 Side Paper Deck SW102 SW101 PS106 PS105 PS101 PS104 PS102 PS103 PS107 SW100 PS109 PS108 ...

Page 719: ...ion of the deck lifter Detects installation connection of the deck Detects paper in the vertical path for the deck Detects the deck paper supply position Detects the level of paper in the deck Detects the state open of the deck Deck open switch Deck open detecting switch Deck lifter upper limit detecting switch Symbol Photointerrupter Switch Microswitch Name PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 PS106 PS1...

Page 720: ...13 TROUBLESHOOTING 13 144 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 2 Motors Clutches Solenoids and PCBs Figure 13 611 Side Paper Deck M101 SL102 M102 SL101 CL101 2 1 CL102 ...

Page 721: ...3 TROUBLESHOOTING M101 M102 CL101 CL102 SL101 SL102 1 2 M C L S L Deck main motor Deck lifter motor Deck vertical path clutch Deck pickup clutch Deck pickup roller releasing solenoid Deck open solenoid Side deck driver PCB Open switch PCB Symbol Motor Clutch Solenoid PCB Name Notation Description ...

Page 722: ...inside the machine those needed in the field are discussed Caution 1 Some LEDs emit dim light even when they are off This is a normal condition and must be kept in mind 2 VRs that may be used in the field VRs that must not be used in the field Caution The VRs and check pins not found in the tables are for factory use only They require special tools and high accuracy and therefore must not be touch...

Page 723: ...C PCB Figure 13 612 The functions of the DIP switch SW1 are as follows use it to change the country site of installation J1409 J1408 J1401 J1402 J1403 J1406 J1405 J1410 BAT1 SW1 ON J1409 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Setting Configuration AB A INCH AB INCH ...

Page 724: ...G 13 148 COPYRIGHT 1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 2 Image Processor PCB Figure 13 613 J1111 BAT1 J1114 J1109 J1108 J1112 J1105 J1106 J1107 J1113 J1103 J1102 J1101 J1110 LED1 LED2 LED3 LED4 ...

Page 725: ...NER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 13 149 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 3 DC Controller PCB Figure 13 614 J524 J521 J523 J525 J510 J511 J512 J513 J514 J515 J516 J517 J518 J519 J501 J502 J503 J504 J505 J506 J507 J508 J509 J520 VR1 J522 J526 ...

Page 726: ...ageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 4 DC Power Supply PCB Figure 13 615 5 Relay PCB Figure 13 616 FU101 J701 J703 J702 Q931 R261 J712 J711 J1705 J1704 J1704 J1716 J1712 J1714 J1705 J1701 J1719 J1711 J1718 J1713 J1721 J1720 J1717 J1723 J1702 J1703 J1722 J1706 ...

Page 727: ...1999 CANON INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 13 151 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 Control Panel CPU PCB Figure 13 617 J1002 J1004 J1003 J1013 J1009 J1008 J1001 J1005 J1006 J1012 J1011 J1010 ...

Page 728: ...00 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 7 HV DC PCB Figure 13 618 The slide switch SW101 is for factory use only and is not used for servicing work in the field Keep it as it is set at the factory J732 J737 J733 SW101 J731 J734 J721 J722 J723 3 1 2 1 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 4 1 5 1 16 Settings ...

Page 729: ...NC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 13 153 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 Side Deck Driver side paper deck Figure 13 619 J106 J103 J105 J107 J101 J102 J109 2 1 13 6 1 1 3 7 1 J108 8 1 1 3 10 1 J104 12 1 1 ...

Page 730: ...copier may be upgraded by either of the following two ways 1 Replacing the DIMM on the image processor PCB and the DIMM on the MFC PCB or 2 Re writing the contents of the DIMM by downloading from the computer A Replacing the DIMM Figure 13 701 shows where the DIMMs are mounted Figure 13 701 DIMM on the image processor PCB DIMM on the MFC PCB ...

Page 731: ... of the Image Processor PCB 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet 2 Remove the copyboard glass and detach the small cover of the IP cover by removing the screw 3 Open the claws of the slot and pull off the DIMM as if to lift it at an angle Figure 13 702 Push Push DIMM Small cover Screw ...

Page 732: ...IN U S A 2 Removing the DIMM of the MFC PCB 1 Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet 2 If the printer board is installed remove it 3 Remove the rear cover 4 Open the claws of the slot and remove the DIMM as if to lift it at an angle Figure 13 703 Push Push DIMM ...

Page 733: ...urn off the copier s main power switch and disconnect the power plug if the printer board is installed disconnect the cable 2 Open the front door and open the connector cover for downloading Figure 13 704 3 Slide the switch shown in Figure 13 705 to LOAD position and disconnect the two connec tors Figure 13 705 4 Connect the copier and the PCB with the bi Centronics cable Keep the PC OFF Be sure t...

Page 734: ...on the control panel power switch b Downloading 1 When the copier service support tool has started select To Main Menu on the screen 2 Select Next under Download Upload Figure 13 706 3 Select the PCB for downloading IP DIMM for IP CPU MFC DIMM for MFC 4 Start downloading for the flash ROM as instructed on the screen of the PC 5 When downloading has ended turn off the PC as follows Press OK return ...

Page 735: ... 2 Turn off the PC 3 Disconnect the bi Centronics cable from the PC and the copier 4 Slide the download switch to the COPY position and connect the two connectors Figure 13 707 5 Close the connector cover and close the front door 6 Turn on the main power switch and the control panel power switch 7 Start service mode and check the ROM version COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY Switch for down loading Conn...

Page 736: ...reen Level 1 Level 2 screen and Level 3 screen Figure 13 A801 Configuration of the Screens Initial screen Level 1 Level 2 screen Level 3 Item screen Level 3 Item screen Level 3 Item screen User screen From Level 1 Level 2 screen Reset key Previous Next page Previous Next page Previous Next page 2 8 Reset key Select a Level 1 item at the top of the screen then select a Level 2 item Level 3 Item scr...

Page 737: ... keypad at the same time 3 Press the asterisk key on the control panel The above operations bring up the Initial screen Figure 13 A803 Figure 13 A803 Initial Screen COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER Control display mode I O display mode Adjustment mode Operation inspection mode Settings mode Test print mode Counter mode COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Shown if i...

Page 738: ...M Each machine is adjusted at the factory and its adjustment values are recorded on the service label attached to the cover of the service document case Table 13 A801 If you have replaced the above PCBs or initialized the RAMs the corresponding values will be affected If you have made adjustments or changed service mode values in the field be sure to record the new values on the service label Figu...

Page 739: ... Operation a Initial Screen Figure 13 A805 b Level 1 Level 2 Screen Figure 13 A806 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch an item to select Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function VERSION USER ACC STS ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR HV STS Level 1 items Touch an item to select Level 2 items Touch an item to select ...

Page 740: ...am The copier is in the process of a service operation The copier is in operation e g initial rotation The copier s door is open The copier is making copies The copier has a service error Level 3 item To next page To previous page Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa bbbbb OK To reverse and key Use it to stop an ongoing operation A press on an item highlights it agains...

Page 741: ...HOOTING B DISPLAY Control Display Mode When you select COPIER DISPLAY you will see the following screen and are given the choices shown in the table that follows Figure 13 B801 COPIER DISPLAY Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function VERSION USER ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR DPOT SENSOR MISC ALARM1 HV STS ...

Page 742: ...f the upper fixing roller detected by the main thermistor TH1 FIX E Indicates the temperature of the ends of the upper fixing roller detected y the sub thermistor TH2 CST STS WIDTH C3 Indicates the paper size for the cassette 3 WIDTH C4 Indicates the paper size for the cassette 4 WIDTH MF Indicates the paper width new value or the paper size for the manual feed tray JAM Indicates the jam history E...

Page 743: ... INC CANON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A 13 167 CHAPTER 13 TROUBLESHOOTING Items under FEEDER DISPLAY Level 1 Level 3 Description DISPLAY FEEDSIZE Indicates the size of an original detected by the feeder ...

Page 744: ...on the PS PCL controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the LIPS controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the MFC PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the PCL controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the PS Kanji controller PCB Indicates the version of the ROM on the saddle stitcher controller PCB R D control number Version number Level 3 LAN GUAGE COUNTER MODEL Des...

Page 745: ...t lamp sensor Indicates the temperature at the middle of the upper fixing roller detected by the main thermistor TH1 Indicates the temperature of the ends of the upper fixing roller detected by the sub thermistor TH2 ANALOG Indicates the readings of analog sensors Remarks The paper width is shown as a whole number omitting decimal places Level 3 WIDTH C3 WIDTH C4 WIDTH MF Description Indicates the...

Page 746: ...BBBB CCCC DDDD E FFff G HHHHHH IIIII Description Remarks Indicates the order of jams the higher the number the older the jam AAA 1 to 200 200 as highest Indicates the date of a jam BBBB Month and day in 2 digits each Indicates the time of a jam CCCC In 24 hr notation Indicates jam recovery time DDDD In 24 hr notation Indicates the source of paper G See Table 13 B802 Indicates the location of a jam...

Page 747: ...ette 3 pickup sensor PS37 Cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42 Vertical path 1 sensor PS47 Vertical path 2 sensor PS49 Vertical path 3 sensor PS41 Vertical path 4 sensor PS46 Registration sensor PS5 U turn sensor PS13 Pre confluence sensor PS14 Post confluence sensor PS15 Front deck left feed sensor PS26 Front deck right feed sensor PS27 Side paper deck feed sensor PS106 Manual feed tray feed sensor PS35...

Page 748: ...7 8 9 A B C Description Front deck right Front deck left Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Side paper deck Not used Not used Not used Not used Manual feed tray Not used Duplexing assembly 2 ROM Ver IP 10 or later MFC 10 or late Table 13 B803 b Code 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Description Front deck right Front deck left Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Not used Not used Side paper deck Manual feed tray Duplexing assembly Insert...

Page 750: ...BBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G AAA BBBB CCCC DDDD EEEE FFff G Description Remarks Indicates the order of errors the higher the number the older the error AAA 1 to 64 64 as highest Indicates the date of an error BBBB Month day 2 digits each Indicates the time of an error CCCC In 24 hr notation Indicates the time of error recovery DDDD In 24 hr notation Indicates the locati...

Page 751: ...nisher Alarms For details of each code see the Finisher Service Manual Tray alarm Code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 Type Separation charging assembly leakage Feeding fan FM7 locking De curling fan FM6 locking Front deck right lifter fault Front deck left lifter fault Cassette 3 lifter fault Cassette 4 lifter fault Side paper deck lifter fault Stack alarm Stapler alarm saddle stitcher Stapler alarm fini...

Page 752: ...ndicates the level of current µA applied to the transfer charging wire Indicates the level of current µA applied to the separation charging wire Indicates the level of voltage of the DC bias V applied to the developing cylinder HV STS Indicates the voltage current levels of the high voltage system Remarks Reference 62 to 82 Reference 432 to 452 Level 3 DPOT K VL1M VDM DPOT Indicates the measuremen...

Page 753: ...atio of the scanning lamp MISC Indicates other data Remarks Indicates the duration of activation in needed to obtain an optimum light intensity if new about 50 Around 80 suspect that the end of life is near Level 3 FEEDSIZE Description Indicates the size of an original detected by the feeder FEEDER Indicates data related to the feeder Remarks COPIER DISPLAY FEEDER DISPLAY ...

Page 754: ...ows the Level 2 Item screen and the items for I O mode Figure 13 C801 COPIER I O Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function IP DC CON FEEDER SORTER MF CON Input output port of the DC controller PCB Input output port for the IP PCB Input output port for the ADF controller PCB Input output port for the finisher controller PCB Input output port for the MFC PCB ...

Page 755: ...ion Not used Right deck lifter ON OFF Left deck lifter ON OFF Cassette 3 lifter ON OFF Cassette 4 lifter ON OFF Not used Not used SLAVE PRDV Not used Primary wire cleaner drive Primary wire cleaner drive Not used Not used Pre transfer wire cleaner drive Pre transfer wire cleaner drive Transfer separation wire cleaner drive Transfer separation wire cleaner drive Signal C3 LNG0 C3 LNG1 C4 LNG0 C4 LN...

Page 756: ... Not used Right deck lifter sensor Left deck lifter sensor Cassette 3 lifter sensor Cassette 4 lifter sensor Right deck open Left deck open Cassette 3 open Cassette 4 open Not used Not used Not used Not used Right deck paper Left deck paper Cassette 3 paper Cassette 4 paper Signal OPT D0 OPT D1 OPT D2 OPT D3 OPT CD0 OPT CD1 OPT CD2 OPT CCW OPT CLK RDK LFT DT LDK LFT DT C3 LFT DT C4 LFT DT RDK OPN ...

Page 757: ...n Manual feed tray paper sensor Registration paper sensor Right deck pickup sensor Cassette 3 paper sensor Vertical path 3 paper sensor Cassette 4 paper sensor Vertical path 4 paper sensor Right deck paper sensor Pre registration paper sensor Left deck paper sensor Vertical path 2 paper sensor External delivery sensor Internal delivery sensor Fixing feeding outlet sensor Fixing claw jam sensor Lef...

Page 758: ...cting switch Primary charging wire detecting switch Transfer separation charging wire cleaner detecting switch Cartridge door open closed sensor Right cover upper open closed sensor Not used Right door closed open sensor Left door closed open sensor Signal PS37S PS42S PS25S PS12S PS13S PS14S PS15S PS16S PS19S TS1S TS2S TS3S PS7S PS8S MSW1S MSW2S SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 SIZE4 PS4S MSW3S MSW4S MSW6S PS59S...

Page 759: ...mp absent detection Not used Main SSR error detection Sub SSR error detection Main switch shut off open circuit detection Primary charging assembly cleaning fan stop detection Fixing delivery fan stop detection Scanner cooling fan stop detection Fan stop detection Laser driver cooling fan stop detection De curling fan stop detection Feeding fan stop detection Signal PS48S PS56S MSW7S TPCNCT PS28S ...

Page 760: ...an stop detec tion Not used Not used Drum motor lock detection Laser scanner motor lock detection Fixing drive motor lock detection Not used Not used Not used Not used Fluorescent lamp detection Not used Scanner home position detec tion Not used Slave power ready detection Not used CC V connect signal Power supply control detection Not used Signal FM8LCK FM9LCK FM10LCK FM11LCK FM12LCK FM13LCK FM14...

Page 761: ...clutch Vertical path 3 clutch Cassette 4 pickup clutch Vertical path 4 clutch Right deck pickup clutch Vertical path 1 clutch Left deck pickup clutch Vertical path 2 clutch Pre registration clutch Lower feeding middle clutch Lower feeding right clutch Left deck feed clutch Delivery speed switching clutch Registration brake clutch Multifeeder feed clutch Signal 24ERR 38ERR PR ERR TR ERR POST ERR OP...

Page 762: ...rn Fixing feeding unit locking solenoid pull Inverter cooling fan full speed Inverter cooling fan full speed Not used Not used Not used Not used Transfer guide bias ON OFF Transfer guide bias switch Drum motor drive Main motor drive Pickup motor drive Fixing motor drive Laser scanner motor drive Cartridge motor drive Hopper motor drive Laser scanner motor switch Signal CL1D CL4D SL7D SL8D SL9D SL1...

Page 763: ... speed Separation fan half speed Laser scanner fan full speed Not used Not used Not used Feeding fan full speed Feeding fan half speed Drum fan full speed Drum fan half speed De curling fan full speed Not used Pre transfer charging assembly fan full speed Pre transfer charging assembly fan half speed Signal CST HTR ON PRH ON HEAT ON MH ON SH ON D HTR ON FM11D 12D FM11D 12D FM13D FM13D FM14D FM7D F...

Page 764: ...ver cooling fan full speed Not used Copier ADF image leading edge select Not used Shut off Power off Original size detection ON OFF CCV count CCX count Scan start Fluorescent lamp ON OFF Counter 1 total Counter 2 options Counter 3 print Not used Not used Pre exposure lamp ON OFF Not used Signal FM1D FM1D FM2D FM2D FM3D 4D FM3D 4D FM5D SW OFF CC5 CNT CCX CNT FLON CNT1D CNT2D CNT3D PEX ON Connector ...

Page 765: ...ion Potential sensor ON OFF Not used Not used HVT DC component ON OFF HVT developing AC component ON OFF Not used HVT pre transfer AC separation AC component ON OFF Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal POT...

Page 766: ...it6 bit7 bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7 bit8 bit9 bit10 bit11 bit12 bit13 bit14 bit15 Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signa...

Page 767: ... Delivery solenoid position 1 Delivery solenoid position 2 Stopper plate solenoid position 1 Stopper plate solenoid position 2 Solenoid timer Not used Not used Not used Not used Pickup roller home position sensor Pickup roller height sensor 2 Pickup roller height sensor 1 Pre reversal sensor Not used Original sensor LED Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal SL3D SL1D SL4D1 S...

Page 768: ...ed registration roller paper sensor Not used Not used Not used Tx transmission Da load Rx reception EEPROM chip select Serial reference clock Separation motor encoder Not used Not used Belt motor mode 1 Belt motor mode 2 Belt motor reference clock Belt motor CW CCW Separation motor PWM Reversal motor layer B Delivery motor PWM Reversal motor layer A Signal SPS TRNA_X BTCLK RGAS MFRGS SERIAL_DO DAC...

Page 769: ...r B Pickup motor hold AD trigger Not used Separation clutch Skew sensor Original delivery sensor Manual feed cassette sensor Not used Reversal sensor Registration roller clock DIP switch 1 DIP switch 2 DIP switch 3 DIP switch 4 DIP switch 5 DIP switch 6 Left cover sensor front Left cover sensor rear Signal ITOP F RGBS SEPCLKPEF EJCLK PICKA PICKB PICKHOLB ADTRG CLD SKS EJJAM MFST TNS TRCLK DIPSW1 D...

Page 770: ...lide switch 0 Slide switch 1 Slide switch 2 Slide switch 3 Slide switch 4 Push switch 1 Push switch 2 Push switch 3 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal 7SEG_D 7SEG_E 7SEG_C 7SEG_G 7SEG_B 7SEG_F 7SEG_A RFOP SSW 0 SSW 1 SSW 2 SSW 3 SSW 4 PSHSW 1 PSHSW 2 PSHSW 3 Connector CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU CPU J12 15 J51 5 J51 4 J51 3 J51 2 J51 6 CPU CPU CPU bit bit0 b...

Page 771: ...nsor S3 detection Not used Not used Shutter home position detection Rear jogging plate home position PI7 detection Front jogging plate home position PI9 detection Tray auxiliary plate retraction detection Signal UPSCHG ENTPCB LWRPPCB RJOGHP FJOGHP SPTTRYIN Remarks 0 ON 1 paper present 1 constant speed 0 acceleration 0 busy 0 reset 1 paper absent 0 paper present 0 HP 1 HP 1 HP 1 HP Connector J119 2...

Page 772: ...otor M3 B B Inlet motor M1 clock Delivery motor M3 ON Signal STDLV BUFMA BUFMB BUFMA BUFMB EJCMA EJCMB INPASSMCLK EJCMHLD Remarks 0 paper present 1 paper present 0 CS 1 down alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 alternately 0 and 1 1 OFF 0 ON Connector CP104 CP120A 7 IC145 2 J120 B3 IC102 3 IC102 1 IC102 4 J101 1 IC1...

Page 773: ...ion Folding feeding path 1 detection Folding feeding path 2 detection Folding feeding path 3 detection Folding feeding path 4 detection Signal INPASSMON INPASSMCW INPASSMBRK BFPSSCHG INPASSMLOCK NSTDLV BFPSSXIT HOOKEMP CRTSET SLFPRIM Remarks 1 OFF 0 ON 1 CW 0 CCW 1 CCW 0 CW 0 ON 1 CCW 0 CW 1 braked 1 wrapped 0 released 0 lock 1 paper present 0 lock 1 paper present 1 staple absent 1 absent 0 presen...

Page 774: ...ont jogging plate motor M4 hold Knurled belt solenoid SL3 Rear jogging plate motor M5 A Rear jogging plate motor M5 B Rear jogging plate motor M5 hold Not used Signal FANSTP FANON BUFMHLD FJOGMA FJOGMA FJOGMB FJOGMB FDBLT RJOGMA RJOGMA RJOGMB RJOGMB Remarks 1 open 1 OFF 0 present 0 present 0 present 0 Present 0 OFF 1 error 0 normal 1 OFF 0 ON 1 ON 0 OFF 1 OFF 0 ON 1 constant speed 0 acceleration a...

Page 775: ...per cover detection Inserter open detection Front cover open sensor PI1 detection Upper cover open sensor PI5 detection Z folding path set detection Z folding path 1 paper level detection Saddle inlet front path sensor Puncher waste paper feeder motor ON Stacker sub tray solenoid ON Not used Inlet motor M10 gain adjustment Not used Saddle path flapper solenoid ON Inserter drive motor ON Not used S...

Page 776: ...t used Not used Not used Sample tray detection SW103 1 SW103 2 SW103 3 SW103 4 SW103 5 SW103 6 SW103 7 SW103 8 Signal STTRYPA SWDGDCL SWORN BNDLDELV Remarks 1 paper present 1 paper present 1 paper present 1 paper present 1 paper present 0 close 1 open 1 paper present 1 set 1 present 0 absent 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON Connector J117 A6 J117 A7 J117 A8 J110 B7 J115 B10 J108 B3 J108 B6 ...

Page 777: ...nserter stopper solenoid SL11 ON inserter separation clutch CL1 ON Signal DOCST INSPKSL INSSTPSL1 INSSTPSL2 INSSEPCL Remarks 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 1 2 holes 0 3 holes 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 0 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 high speed 1 paper present 1 ON 0 ON 1 ON Connector PSW 104 PSW 106 PSW 105 SW107 1 SW107 2 SW107 3 SW107 4 SW107 5 LED101 LED101 LED101 LED101 LED101 LED101 LED101 LED101 J844 2...

Page 778: ...th paper sensor 2 PI35 feed path paper sensor 3 S8 Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal FFMCLK FENTSL FPRSELSL FB4 2SL FPRSSL FB4 1SL FPD2 FPD3 Remarks 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 paper present 1 paper present Connector J798 4 folder driver PCB J74 6 folder driver PCB J793 2 folder driver PCB J794 4 folder driver PCB J7983 4 folder driver PCB J794 2 folder driver PCB J797 6 folder driver...

Page 779: ...1 stapler shift home position sensor PI17 stapling home position sensor PI19 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used stapler motor M111 reverse stapler shift motor M10 hold Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal STTRYLW PHROTHP PHHP PNSNRHOLD PHSNRPH STTRYUPPO STTRYLWPO STPLHP STPDRHP Remarks 1 lower limit 0 HP 1 HP during output alternately 0 and 1 during output alternately 0 an...

Page 780: ...106 stapler motor M11 CW Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal DSTD SMPPAPRME STKPAPRMV SMPTRYPAP STKTRYPAP ENTPCB BFPCB PHPADG STTRYDL SMPTRYDY PHCMPL Remarks 0 full 1 paper absent 1 paper absent 1 paper absent 1 paper absent 1 paper present 1 paper present 1 paper present while motor rotates alternately 0 and 1 while motor rotates alternately 0 and 1 0 end Connector J128 3 J121 A7 ...

Page 781: ... ascent descent motor M13 A tray A ascent descent motor M13 B punch rotation motor M18 A punch rotation motor M18 B tray A upper position sensor PI28 tray A lower positions sensor PI27 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal SMPTRYUPPO SMPTRYLWPO Remarks 1 light blocked 1 light blocked Connector J112 3 5 J112 2 4 J118 A9 J118 A8 J110 A5 J110 A4 J110 A3 J110 A...

Page 782: ...0 PRINTED IN U S A Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal Remarks Connector bit DA1 DA2 DA3 DA4 DA5 DA6 DA7 DA8 DA9 DA10 DA11 DA12 Address P043 P044 P045 P046 P047 P048 P049 P050 P051 P052 P053 P054 I O SORTER ...

Page 783: ... used feed roller lock solenoid SL33 drive signal solenoid timer full draw output paper positioning plate motor power 24V power down detection paper push on plate leading edge position detection signal delivery sensor PI71 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Signal FLPSL1 FLPSL2 RLNIPSL LUNGETOP DELV Remarks L CW L CCW L CW L CCW L CW L CCW L ON L ON H ON L ON L ON H down H leading edge L...

Page 784: ...65 connection detection Not used Not used paper positioning plate motor M34 phase A paper positioning plate motor M34 phase B paper push on plate motor M34 PWM saddle feed motor M31 power saddle feed motor M31 phase A saddle feed motor M31 phase B saddle feed motor M31 reference clock paper push on plate motor M38 CCW output Signal LUNGEHP JOGHP STRHP PAPPOS INLTCVR FDRLHP JOGHP Remarks H HP L HP ...

Page 785: ...ition PI65 connection detection Not used output cover sensor PI63 connection detection Not used paper push on plate leading edge sensor PI75 connection paper push on plate home position sensor PI74 connection detection saddle tray paper sensor PI52 2 saddle tray paper sensor PI51 3 Signal 2NDPA 3RDPA STCHHP2 STCHHP1 PPOSPAR TRYPAR1 VPJM TRYPAR2 TRYPAR3 Remarks L CW L ON L ON L paper present L pape...

Page 786: ...ensor PI63 Not used inlet cover sensor PI69 Not used DIPSW1 Bit 8 DIPSW1 Bit 7 DIPSW1 Bit 6 DIPSW1 Bit 5 DIPSW1 Bit 4 DIPSW1 Bit 3 DIPSW1 Bit 2 DIPSW1 Bit 1 Signal HMEMP2 HKEMP1 EJCVR INLTCVR Remarks L staple absent L staple absent H open H open L open L open L open H open L ON L ON L ON L ON L ON L ON L ON L ON Connector J8 8 J8 1 J11 9 J10 8 bit bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7 bit0 bit1 ...

Page 787: ...onnection detection guide plate home position sensor PI73 connection detection Not used paper push on plate leading edge sensor PI75 connection Signal HKEMP2 HKEMP1 Remarks if 92 or higher staple present if 92 or higher staple present if 128 or higher connected if 128 or higher connected if 128 or higher connected if 128 or higher connected Connector J8 8 J8 1 J10 6 J14 6 J9 7 J13 13 bit AN0 AN1 A...

Page 788: ...isplay 00000000 00001010 00000101 00001111 Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Setting of DIPSW1 5 Setting of DIPSW1 6 Setting of DIPSW1 7 Setting of DIPSW1 8 Signal HPORT43 HPORT42 HPORT41 HPORT40 Remarks Indicate the settings of the DIP switch SW1 on the MFC PCB see the table below Connector CPU CPU CPU CPU bit bit0 bit1 bit2 bit3 bit4 bit5 bit6 bit7 Address P001 ...

Page 790: ...NTED IN U S A D ADJUST Adjustment Mode Figure 13 D801 shows the screen under COPIER AJDUST and its Level 3 items Figure 13 D801 Level 2 Items under COPIER ADJUST LAMP AE BLANK V CONT ADJ XY CCD LASER DEVELOP HV SP MISC DENS HV PRI HV TR FEED ADJ CST ADJ Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function ...

Page 791: ...A PWR B 48 to 432 Use it to set the laser B power adjustment value IP DELAY 5 to 25 Use it to set the laser delay value for the IP PCB DEVELOP DE DC 0 to 500 Use it to set the developing DC output adjustment value for image exposure DE NO DC 0 to 500 Use it to set the developing DC output adjustment value for image exposure DE OFST 50 to 50 Use it to adjust the offset for the image bias DC compone...

Page 792: ...JUST REGIST 50 to 50 Use it to adjust the activation timing for the registration clutch ADJ REFE 101 to 100 Use it to adjust the re pickup horizontal registration CST ADJ C3 STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 3 STMTR C3 A4R Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 3 A4R C4 STMTR Use it to adjust the paper width sensor for the cassette 4 STMTR C4 A4R Use ...

Page 793: ...xecution of COPIER FUNCTION CCD CCD ADJ enter the value recorded on the service label This will determine FL PWM Remarks Range 0 to 255 Level 3 AE TBL Description Adjusting Text Density for Real Time AE Mode Enter a value to adjust the density correction curve for real time AE mode 10 settings Remarks Range 0 to 9 default 5 Higher setting Lower setting Higher intensity Lower intensity White White ...

Page 794: ...he home position standard white plate read position Remarks Range 360 to 1360 each 12 causes a shift of 1 mm Range 0 to 2970 12 causes a shift of 1 mm Be sure to execute this mode before adjusting the margin Do not create a margin using this mode Range 0 to 4 If dirt exists on the standard white plate use this mode to avoid reading the area Vertical size plate Standard white plate Higher setting L...

Page 795: ...ven number pixels Use it to enter a gain adjustment value for the CCD output for odd number pixels Use it to enter an offset adjustment value for the CCD output for even number pixels Use it to enter an offset adjustment value for the CCD output for odd number pixels Use it to enter a white level target value for shading correction Remarks Execute COPIER FUNC TION CCD CCD ADJ then if a faulty imag...

Page 796: ...y value for the laser unit Remarks Range 300 to 300 If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the label on the PCB Note that laser A shifts in sync with laser B If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the PCB If you have replaced the laser unit or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter ...

Page 797: ... Remarks Range 0 to 500 If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Range 50 to 50 If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Level 3 DENS ADJ Description Correcting Copy Density Use it to correct the f value table if the copy image is foggy or the high den...

Page 798: ...ge width adjustment value for the image trailing edge Remarks If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Level 3 EPOTOFST VL OFST VD OFST Description Use it to enter an offset value for the potential sensor Use it to enter an offset value for the VL target potential Use it to enter an offset value for the VD target potential R...

Page 799: ...de of double sided sheet Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the transfer charging current for plain paper 2nd side of double sided sheet Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the pre transfer charging current Remarks If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Level 3 SP N1 SP N2 Description Use it to enter...

Page 800: ...he cassette 3 STMTR Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the cassette 3 A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the cassette 4 STMTR Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the cassette 4 A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the manual feed tray A4R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the manual feed tray A6R Use it to enter a paper width basic value...

Page 801: ...e atmospheric pressure A higher setting will lower the target control potential A lower atmospheric pressure tends to cause leakage indicating the need for a lower target control potential Remarks Range 0 to 3 0 Standard default 1 1 to 0 70 atm up to elevation of about 3 000 m 2 0 70 to 0 65 atm elevation of about 3 000 to 3 500 m 3 0 65 to 0 60 atm elevation of about 3 500 to 4 500 m ...

Page 803: ...al tray will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass 5 Open the feeder slowly and check the position of the paper 6 Close the feeder slowly without removing the paper 7 Press the OK key The paper on the copyboard glass will be delivered to the original tray 8 If the stop position is not as indicated go back to step 3 and make adjustments once again Remarks Range 35 to 35 Each 1 causes a sh...

Page 804: ... feed tray will be picked up and stopped on the copyboard glass 5 Open the feeder slowly and check the position of the paper 6 Close the feeder slowly without removing the paper 7 Press the OK key The paper on the copyboard board glass will be delivered to the manual feed tray 8 If the stop position is not as indicated go back to step 3 and make adjustments once gain Remarks Range 50 to 50 Each 1 ...

Page 805: ...C of the ADF on the feeder side Range 25 to 25 each 1 causes a shift of 0 1 mm The data is retained by the IP PCB on the copier If you have replaced the IP PCB or initialized the RAM on the IP PCB enter the value recorded on the service label Range 30 to 30 each 1 increases the speed by 0 1 The data is retained by the controller PBC of the ADF on the feeder side Remarks Range 6 to 24mm 12mm at def...

Page 806: ...AN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A E FUNCTION Operation Inspection Mode Figure 13 E801 shows the screen under COPIER FUNCTION and its items Figure 13 E801 Items under COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CCD DPC CST FIXING PANEL CLEAR LASER PART CHK MISC R HRD DISK Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function ...

Page 807: ...ic value for the manual feed tray A4 FIXING NIP CHK Use it to generate a nip width check image output for the fixing roller PANEL LCD CHK Use it to check missing dots on the touch panel LED CHK Use it to check the activation of the LEDs on the control panel LED OFF Use it to check the de activation of the LEDs on the control panel KEY CHK Use it to check the inputs of the keys on the control panel...

Page 808: ...it to clean the separation belt of the feeder REG CLN Use it to clean the registration roller of the feeder The state of the machine is indicated in the upper right corner of the screen Pay attention to the indications while executing service mode they include the following READY The machine is ready for servicing copying operation SERVICE The machine is performing servicing operations This indica...

Page 809: ...ine is in operation Remarks A count down number is indicated to the right of TONER S during operation No key except the Stop key is enabled during operation Level 3 CCD ADJ Description Executing Auto Adjustment for Shading Operation 1 Place standard white paper 10 sheets or more on the copyboard glass 2 Select CCD ADJ to highlight and press the Ok key 3 See that the machine has entered auto adjust...

Page 810: ...ting Automatic Adjustment of Photosensitive Drum Potential Related Items Level 3 POWER A POWER B Description Turning On the Laser Operation 1 Select POWER A or POWER B to highlight and press the OK key 2 See that the selected laser turns on and SERVICE is indicated in the upper right of the screen 3 See that the laser turns off automatically in about 30 sec To turn off the laser before that press ...

Page 811: ...on 1 Make about 20 copies of the Test Sheet in A4 2 Set A3 paper on the manual feed tray 3 Select NPP CHK to highlight and press the OK key The paper will be picked up and stopped between the fixing rollers then it will be discharged in about 20 sec 4 Measure the width as indicated Caution a and c are points 10 mm from both ends of paper Remarks Feeding direction Standard a c 0 5 mm or less Standa...

Page 812: ... the Control Panel Operation 1 Select item to highlight and press the OK key The LEDs will turn on in sequence To stop select LED OFF Ending a Check on the LEDs of the Control Panel Operation 1 Select the item to highlight ending the operation Checking the Key Inputs Operation 1 Select the item to highlight 2 Press any key to check If normal the corresponding characters will be indicated on the to...

Page 813: ...ation 1 Select CL ON and press the OK key Selecting the Motor to Check Operation 1 Select MTR 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the motor to check See the code table that follows 3 Press the OK key Checking the Motor Operation 1 Select MTR ON and press the OK key Selecting the Solenoid to Check Operation 1 Select SL 2 Using the keypad enter the code of the solenoid See the code table that follo...

Page 814: ...rive clutch CL3 Manual feed tray feeding clutch CL18 Hopper drive clutch CL1 Developing cylinder drive clutch CL4 Registration roller drive clutch CL2 Side paper deck feeding clutch CL101 Side paper deck pickup clutch CL102 Drum motor M0 Main motor M1 Pickup motor M2 Fixing motor M3 Laser scanner motor M4 Cartridge motor M6 Hopper motor M18 Horizontal registration motor M15 Duplexing reversal moto...

Page 815: ...ration 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power Use it to clear the password set in user mode for system administrator Operation 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key 2 Turn off and then on the main power Remarks The code is cleared only when the main power switch is turned off and then on Be sure to turn it off and then on The RAM is ...

Page 816: ... 1 Select the item to highlight and press the OK key The scanning lamp will turn on for about 3 sec and then will turn off Remarks HRD DISK Checking the Operation of the Hard Disk Level 3 SCANDISK FORMAT Description Detecting an Error on Initializing the Hard Disk The operation starts and the count is made starting at 0 the operation ends at 100 in about 25 min Initializing the Hard Disk ends in a...

Page 817: ...peration is identical to when the push switch SW2 is turned on Cleaning the Feeder Separation Belt See chapter 5 E Cleaning For Details see the Feeder Service Manual The operation is identical to when the push switch SW2 is turned on Cleaning the Feeder Registration Roller See E Cleaning For details see the feeder Service Manual The operation is identical to when the push switch SW2 is turned on F...

Page 818: ...ION Settings Mode Figure 13 F801 shows the screen under COPIER OPTION and its items Figure 13 F801 Screen under Items COPIER OPTION Display I O Adjust Option Test Counter Function BODY USER CST ACC Note The new setting for each item of OPTION will be stored in memory when the main power switch is turned off and then on ...

Page 819: ...N Turns on off the charging wire auto cleaning mechanism FIX FAN SW Switches the fixing assembly heat discharge fan control mechanism USER COPY LIM Use it to change the upper copy limit SLEEP Use it to turn on off the sleep function WEB DISP Use it to turn on off the fixing cleaning belt level warning indication SIZE DET Use it to turn on off the original size detection function DATE DSP Use it to...

Page 820: ...TION Level 1 Level 3 Description OPTION DOC F SW Use it to turn on off stream reading mode SIZE SW Items under SORTER OPTOIN Level 1 Level 3 Description OPTION BLNK SW Use it to set a margin for the saddle stitcher Items under BOARD OPTION Level 1 Level 3 Description OPTION LIPS HL Use it to select menu display mode for the LIPS board ...

Page 821: ...is effective if CPMKP SW is set to ON Use it to turn on off the down sequence for thick paper Use it to select idle rotation mode for the developing assembly If the images are distorted or the density is too low light select 1 or 2 Remarks 0 off 1 on default 0 AB 6R5E 1 Inch 5R4E 2 A 3R3E 3 AB Inch 6R5E 0 for extremely high humidity 200 V 1 fixed at 600 V 2 fixed at 200 V 3 for extremely high humi...

Page 822: ...lower than standard 2 normal humidity mode 3 high humidity mode current level higher than standard 0 off default 1 on 0 no temperature control for transparency mode normal temperature control only 1 use temperature control for transparency mode at normal control temperature 5 C 2 use temperature control for transparency mode at normal control temperature 10 C 3 use temperature control for transpar...

Page 823: ...ers preferring copying speed Use it to turn on off the transfer current output correction control mechanism for the trailing edge of paper Use it to turn on of separation current output correction control Remarks 1 correct laser power developing bias to suit environment 0 no correction of target value default 2 extremely low humidity 3 low humidity 4 normal humidity 5 high humidity 6 extremely hig...

Page 824: ...e images are uneven because of fixing or the images are too light select 1 Remarks 0 no reduction in fixing temperature 1 reduce after passing 1000 sheets or more 2 reduce after passing 1000 sheets or more in high humidity environment 3 reduce after passing 1000 sheets of AB paper default 0 after passing 1000 single sided copies or 500 double sided copies default 1 after passing 1000 single sided ...

Page 825: ...g Mechanism for each charging wire Switching the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan FM2 Control Mechanism Selecting 1 causes the control of the fan after printing to half speed control If the environment is a high temperature humidity one or the room temperature is 29 C or more the fan will rotate at full speed at all times Remarks 0 no idle rotation default 1 for high humidity initiate idle rotation for 3...

Page 826: ...witch date time notation Use it to restrict the user of the mail box by control card Use it to set a density for printing PDL input Setting the Data Auto Deletion Tim for a Mail box Specify whether to indicate infinite 0 i e no auto deletion for settings in user mode Remarks Range 1 through 999 default at 999 0 off 1 on default 0 disable warning 1 enable warning A warning is indicated when startin...

Page 827: ...t to select paper notation used by paper size group U4 Use it t select paper size for the front deck Use it to select a source of paper for thick paper control C1 front deck right C2 front deck left DK side paper deck C3 cassette 3 C4 cassette 4 Remarks 0 off U1 to U4 on the touch panel 1 on paper names selected under CST U1 through U4 31 G LTR default 22 K LGL 24 FOOLSCAP default 26 OFFICIO 27 E ...

Page 828: ... OFI B OFI A LTR A LTRR G LTR G LTRR A LGL G LGL FOLI A OFI ALL Paper notation LEGAL Korean Government Korean Government R Foolscap Australian Foolscap OFFICIO Ecuadorian Officio Bolivian Officio Argentine Letter Argentine Letter R Government Letter Government Letter R Argentine Legal Government Legal FOLIO Argentine Officio Table 13 F801 Cassette Paper Size Codes ACC Selecting Accessory Related S...

Page 829: ...m reading for large size only 2 disable stream reading 0 disable detection of mix default 1 enable detection of mix Level 3 DOC F SW SIZE SW Description Use it to set the margin W on both sides of the fold for the saddle stitcher Remarks 0 normal width 5 mm 1 larger width 10 mm Level 3 BLNK SW W Description Use it to select menu display mode for the LIPS board For details see the Service Manual fo...

Page 830: ...r A4 LTR paper in the cassette 3 2 Select PG and enter the number of the item using the keypad 3 Press the OK key A test print will be generated Remarks The machine will automatically be in copying mode when it is reset to leave the PG screen For test printing the source of paper is the cassette 3 Level 3 TYPE Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Description TEST PG TYPE Use it to generate test prints Display ...

Page 831: ...TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Grid PG TYPE 1 2 Vertical Lines PG TYPE 2 3 Horizontal Lines PG TYPE 3 Checking Straight Lines right angles displaced laser beam Checking Straight Lines sub scanning direction faulty BD Feeding direction Straight Lines main scanning direction displaced laser beam Feeding direction ...

Page 832: ...ut passing the paper through the density correc tion block image processing The result depends entirely on the performance of the image formation system 5 17 Gradation PG TYPE 5 6 Blank PG TYPE 6 Gradation faulty laser system Uneven Density Faulty primary charging assembly Faulty developing system Fogging faulty photosensitive drum faulty developing assembly faulty laser system ...

Page 833: ...he result is dependent on AE and other density correction mechanisms in addition to the performance of the image formation system 8 Solid Black PG TYPE 8 1 Black Lines scratches on drum dirt on primary charging wire 2 Verti cal White Spots transfer faulty 3 Uneven Left Right Density primary charging assembly faults developing system faults 1 White Spots transfer faults 2 White Lines shading faults...

Page 834: ...ar the Counter Readings 1 Select an item to highlight 2 Press the Clear key on the control panel The counter will be cleared to return to 00000000 The terms large and small as used in reference to sizes mean the following Large size paper is paper whose length is 300 mm or more or paper of a non default size e g B4 or larger Small size paper is paper whose length is less than 300 mm e g A4 or smal...

Page 835: ... cassette 4 pickup counter small size L MF manual feed tray pickup total counter large size S DK manual feed tray pickup total counter small size L DK side paper deck pickup total counter large size S DK side paper deck pickup total counter small size L 2 SIDE double sided 2nd side pickup total counter large size S 2 SIDE double sided 2nd side pickup total counter small size FEEDER L FEED feeder p...

Page 836: ...roller paper passage in number of sheets M PU RL manual feed tray pickup roller paper passage in number of sheets M SP RL manual feed tray feeding roller paper passage in number of sheets PD PU RL side paper deck pick up roller paper passage in number of sheets PD SP RL side paper deck feeding roller paper passage in number of sheets RD PU CL front deck right pickup clutch operations in number of ...

Page 837: ...ec FEED MTR main motor M1 operation time in sec LSR MTR laser scanner motor M4 operation time in sec HD DRV hard disk operation time in sec LSR DRV laser operation time in sec FHTR M fixing main heater H1 operation time in sec FHTR S fixing sub heater H2 operation time in sec B LIGHT control panel back light activation time in sec NON SORT non sort path paper passage in number of sheets SORT sort ...

Page 838: ... faulty The main thermistor TH1 has poor contact or an open circuit The fixing heater H1 H2 has an open circuit The thermal switch TS1 has an open circuit The SSR is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The SSR is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The cleaning belt inside the fixing assembly has been taken up The fixing cleaning belt length sensor PS7 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faul...

Page 839: ... signal MOLCK arrives for 2 sec or more after the output of the drum motor drive signal The waste toner feed screw cannot rotate and the detecting switch MSW2 has been pressed multiple times within a specific period of time No PLL lock signal M1 FG arrive for 2 sec or more after the output of the fixing motor drive signal No clock pulse arrives for 2 sec or more after the output of the pickup moto...

Page 840: ...lty The HV DC PCB is faulty The HV AC PCB is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The HV DC PCB is faulty The HV AC PCB is faulty The separation charging assembly is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit The HV DC PCB is faulty The transfer charging assembly is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit Description No PLL lock signal DMPLK arrives for...

Page 841: ...hermistor is faulty The light intensity control PCB is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit Description The BD signal does not arrive within 1 sec after the output of the laser drive signal The BD signal does not arrive for 1 sec or more while the laser is on The laser power data cannot be written to the laser driver PCB 1 when starting copying or ...

Page 842: ...cific level within 10 sec after the fluorescent lamp has been turned on The activation detection signal FL DTCT arrives within 5 sec after the fluorescent lamp has been turned off The activation detection signal FL DTCT does not arrive within 60 se after the fluorescent lamp has been turned on during shading adjustment The light intensity does not reach a specific level within 10 sec after the flu...

Page 843: ...act The 24 V power supply is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The Copy Data Controller A1 or the Remoto Diagnostic Device II is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit Description The shading end signal from the CCD PCB does not reach the image processor PCB during shading operation The image read end signal from the CCD PCB does not reach the image processor PCB within 60 sec...

Page 844: ...s faulty short circuit open circuit The separation fan FM13 is faulty The DC controller PCB is faulty The wiring is faulty short circuit open circuit Description The auto power off circuit has an open circuit The auto power off signal has been detected twice or more within 2 sec The lock signal FM1LCK FM2LCK is detected for 5 sec or more while the power supply cooling fan 1 and 2 is being driven T...

Page 845: ...h 2 For E202 and E204 you can check codes in service mode COPIER DISPLAY ERR In the case of E202 or E204 the control panel will show the following Figure 13 901 3 E677 If it occurred when the main power is turned on The problem is likely to be a hardware problem E677 also occurs when the power switch is turned off and then on too quickly because of the difference in timing at which the main body a...

Page 846: ...ed for 5 sec or more while the machine is in standby The communication between the machine and the copier is disrupted for 0 5 sec or more while the ADF is in operation No clock signal is generated for 100 msec while the belt motor drive signal is being generated No clock signal is generated for 200 msec while the delivery motor drive signal is being generated No lock signal is generated for 200 m...

Page 847: ...n 5 sec The communication between the master CPU IC101 and the slave CPU IC121 has been disrupted The check sum has an error at power on The clock pulses from the inlet motor are 50 mm sec or less for 1 sec or more while the motor is in operation The clock pulses from the stack delivery motor clock sensor are 50 mm sec or less for 1 sec or more while the motor is in operation The front jogging pla...

Page 848: ...he swing guide closed sensor does not detect the swing guide when the swing motor has been driven for 2 sec detail code 01 The lifter operation does not end within 25 sec after the tray lift motor has been driven The clock pulses from the tray idle rotation sensor are absent for 250 msec or more while the motor is rotating The input from the tray B upper position sensor PI20 is 0 at power on i e t...

Page 849: ...le the motor is in operation the clock pulses from the stack delivery motor clock sensor is under an equivalent of 50 mm sec for 1 sec or more The communication between the master CPU IC101 and slave CPU IC121 stops While the motor is in operation the clock pulses from the inlet motor are under an equivalent of 50 mm sec for 1 sec or more The communication between the copier and the finisher stops...

Page 850: ...ot completed within 25 seconds Clock input from the tray idling sensor has been interrupted for 250 ms during motor rotation Tray A is positioned below the tray B area The stapler does not leave the stapling home position when the stapler motor has been driven for 0 5 sec or more The stapler does not return to the stapling home position when the stapler motor has been driven for 0 5 sec The swing ...

Page 851: ...sor does not turn on when the paddle motor has been driven for 5 seconds for returning to the home position The punch paper edge sensor home position sensor does not detect the home position when the punch sensor shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds or longer The punch paper edge sensor home position sensor does not turn off when the punch sensor shift motor has been driven for 5 seconds or l...

Page 852: ... motor has been driven for 1 25 seconds or longer The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn off when the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 second or longer The stitch home position switch does not turn off when the stitch motor front has been driven forward for 0 5 second or longer 02 The stitch home position sensor does not turn on when the stitch motor fron...

Page 853: ...te home position sensor PI74 connector The state of guide home position sensor connector disconnection is detected 02 The state of paper pressure plate home position sensor connector disconnection is detected Paper pressure plate top position sensor PI75 connector 03 The state of paper pressure plate top position sensor connector disconnection is detected Paper pressure plate motor M38 Paper press...

Page 854: ...ON imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A Code E515 Item Inserter motor clock sensor PI42 Inserter motor M15 Detection Clock input from the inserter motor clock sensor has fallen to a predetermined level or lower during inserter motor rotation 4 Inserter ...

Page 855: ...1999 CANON INC imageRUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A APPENDIX A GENERAL TIMING CHART A 1 B LIST OF SIGNALS ABBREVIATIONS A 3 C GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM A 9 D SPECIAL TOOLS TABLE A 17 E SOLVENTS OILS A 19 ...

Page 856: ... sensor PS47 Registration paper sensor PS5 Internal delivery sensor PS9 External delivery sensor PS10 Delivery speed switching clutch CL21 Registration brake clutch CL3 Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 Developing clutch CL4 Pre registration clutch CL5 Registration clutch CL2 Pre registration brake clutch CL 6 Vertical path 1 clutch CL8 Drum motor M0 Main motor M1 Fixing motor M3 Delivery flapper so...

Page 857: ...M2 Right deck pickup clutch CL10 Right deck pickup solenoid SL7 Right deck paper sensor PS22 Vertical path 1 paper sensor PS47 Registration paper sensor PS5 Internal delivery sensor PS9 External delivery sensor PS10 Delivery speed switching clutch CL21 Registration brake clutch CL3 Fixing inlet guide solenoid SL1 Developing clutch CL4 Pre registration clutch CL5 Registration clutch CL2 Pre registr...

Page 858: ...2 roller clutch drive command deck right pickup clutch drive command deck left pickup clutch drive command cassette 3 pickup clutch drive command vertical path 3 roller clutch drive command cassette 4 pickup clutch drive command vertical path 4 roller clutch drive command lower feeding middle roller clutch drive command lower feeding right roller clutch drive command multifeeder feeding roller clu...

Page 859: ...tion signal de curling fan drive command feeding fan constant speed rotation detection signal feeding fan drive command drum fan constant speed rotation detection signal drum fan drive command inverter cooling fan constant speed rotation detection signal inverter cooling fan drive command pre transfer charging assembly fan constant speed rotation detection signal pre transfer charging assembly fan...

Page 860: ...ation control signal transfer separation charging wire cleaning motor CCW rotation control signal deck right lifter motor drive command deck left lifter motor drive command cassette 3 lifter motor drive command cassette 4 lifter motor drive command hopper inside toner feeder motor power signal hopper inside toner feeder motor power signal fixing main heater power detection signal fixing main heate...

Page 861: ...eder paper detection signal horizontal registration paper detection signal waste toner case full detection signal deck right pickup detection signal deck right lifter detection signal deck right paper detection signal deck right open closed detection signal deck right limit detection signal deck left pickup detection signal deck left feeding paper detection signal deck right feeding paper detectio...

Page 862: ...n signal toner cartridge cover open closed detection signal fixing sub heater power detection signal fixing sub heater drive signal main power switch OFF signal original size detection signal 1 original size detection signal 2 original size detection signal 3 original size detection signal 4 fixing inlet guide solenoid drive command fixing cleaning belt solenoid drive command delivery flapper sole...

Page 863: ...tection signal 0 cassette 3 paper length detection signal 1 cassette 4 paper length detection signal 0 cassette 4 paper length detection signal 1 multifeeder paper width detection signal cassette 3 paper width detection signal cassette 4 paper width detection signal hopper inside toner detection signal hopper inside toner lower limit detection signal developing assembly inside toner detection sign...

Page 864: ...T1 AC POWER UNIT2 FT32 FT33 FT34 FT35 FT36 FT37 FT38 H1 H2 T P J12F J12M J14F J14M J16F J16M J17F J17M FT40 FT39 FT42 FT41 SOL2 SOL1 H3 standard with 100 V model TH HEATER 3 3 1 2 1 2 J18F J18M 2 1 3 2 1 3 J19M J19F H4 2 1 2 1 J20M J20F MT5 J2602 3 1 2 4 5 1 1 J10F J10M 2 2 RL1 100V J2601 1 120V J2601 1 230V J2601 3 FT45 FT44 FT43 24VU 0V FT48 FT47 FT46 From relay PCB FT29 FT30 FT31 7 8 6 SSR1 J15...

Page 865: ...01 38VU GND 1 2 12V GND J801 3 2 1 38VU GND 5V 12V GND 6 4 5 7 J1714 1 3 2 6 5 4 7 9 8 12 10 11 3 3V GND 3 3V J1101 1 2 GND 8V GND 5V 5 4 3 5V 6 J1301 GND 8V GND 5V 2 1 3 4 5 8V GND 6 J761 38VU GND 1 2 3 N C J1715 1 2 3 J37F J37M 1 1 2 2 AWG22 1007 AWG22 1007 J1716 11 1 2 3 4 5 8 6 7 9 10 12 GND GND J1451 12V FA 5V FA 3 3V FA 2 1 3 4 5 GND 6 2 1 3 4 5 6 3 3V J1452 GND 12V 5V GND GND 3 1 2 6 5 4 J3...

Page 866: ... FM5 0V A REMOTE 0V 5V FA 14 13 12 11 J503 B15 A15 10 18V 38ERR 0V 24ERR 9 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J1719 8 FM12LCK 0V FM12 ON 6 5 4 FM11 ON 0V FM11LCK 1 2 3 J155H 3 1 2 4 5 4 6 5 3 2 J155D 6 J155L 1 J157 3 2 1 FM12 J156 1 2 FM11 3 J153H SH ON 24V 0V SHDTC 6 1 5 2 3 4 3 4 MHDTC MH ON J153D J153L 1 2 5 6 14 13 12 11 10 9 5 4 3 1 2 FT50 FT51 FT49 SSR1 8 7 6 1 2 3 5 4 3 1 2 0V FIN Tx0 FIN Rx0 0V 24VU A14 B1...

Page 867: ...3 11 9 FM13 ON FM13CLK 0V 0V FM7 ON 7 6 5 4 1 2 3 0V MSW6S CL2 ON 24V 0V PS5S 5V 6 1 3 2 4 5 8 7 10 9 13 12 11 J209H 1 2 3 2 FM6 J209D 3 J209L 1 SL4 SL CL3 CL J207L J207D J207H 1 2 2 1 J208 1 3 2 PS28 J205D J205L J205H 1 3 3 2 2 1 J206H J206D 1 J206L 2 M M9 2 1 3 2 J204H J204D 1 J204L 4 3 4 2 1 J198L J198D 7 1 5 2 J198H 4 3 2 3 5 4 1 6 FM13 J203D J203L 2 J203H 1 3 2 3 1 J202H J202L J202D 3 1 FM7 1...

Page 868: ... J253L J253D J253H 2 1 1 2 CL CL7 J252D J252L 2 1 1 2 J252H CL CL18 J622 3 2 1 5 4 J621 M2 38V M2 0V 1 2 M2 M 6 1 3 2 4 5 7 J249L 14 MSW2S 11 12 13 9 10 0V 0V M0 ON M0LCK 5V 8 0V 1 J249H 3 2 4 5 J249D 7 6 J243D J243L 7 6 5 3 2 4 1 MSW1S 0V M6 PS59S M6 5V 0V J243H 2 3 1 7 5 6 5 4 4 3 6 7 2 1 J250L J250D J250H 6 5 7 1 3 2 3 4 4 5 1 2 7 6 J251D J251L J251H 1 2 2 1 M0 1 2 3 J502 4 5 1 J601 2 M2 0V M2 ...

Page 869: ... 2 3 M15 M 6 2 3 4 5 1 SIDE_REGI_M_Vcc J326H 3 J326L J326T 1 1 2 3 2 J366H 2 3 2 1 J366L 1 L366T 3 2 4 4 2 1 3 PS14 1 J328 2 PS26 3 J327 18 17 16 5V N C PS26S 15 14 13 12 5V 0V PS14S 0V 1 11 3 2 5 4 9 10 7 8 8 7 6 10 9 4 5 6 2 3 J323T 11 J323L 1 J323H 4 5 6 3 2 1 11 9 10 DUPI_M_Vcc 7 8 SIDE_REGI_M_Vcc SIDE_REGI_M_A SIDE_REGI_M_A SIDE_REGI_M_B SIDE_REGI_M_B Y OR BR BK R R BL GN Y OR BR R 2 1 J325H ...

Page 870: ...0 36 37 38 39 41 42 43 44 GND ABC_ON NWR_LD A6_DIN A5_DCK 49 45 46 47 48 50 50 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 12 11 10 9 17 16 15 14 13 21 20 19 18 26 25 24 23 22 30 29 28 27 35 34 33 32 31 39 38 37 36 44 43 42 41 40 48 47 46 45 50 49 50 50 J1112 INTRQ DIOW GND IORDY GND DIOR GND IOCS16 GND DMACK CSEL CSHD0 DA2 DA0 N C GND N C CSHD1 DA1 DATA6 DATA8 DATA7 DATA4 DATA10 DATA5 DATA9 DATA13 DATA2 DATA12 DATA3 DATA11 ...

Page 871: ...ester electrode Rank A A A B A B No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Remarks For adjusting the laser intensity together with the laser power checker for electrical checks For adjusting the light intensity together with the digital multimeter For adjusting the distance between No 1 and No 2 mirrors For adjusting images and making checks For checking the zero level of the surface potential sensor D SPECIAL TOOLS TABLE Y...

Page 872: ...rsons is expected to carry one C Each workshop is expected to carry one Shape Tool No FY9 3014 FY9 3038 FY9 3039 Tool name Environment sensor meter sensor Tester extension pin Tester extension Pin L tipped Rank B A A No 7 8 9 Remarks For checking the environment sensor For making electrical checks attachment to the meter For making electrical checks attachment to the meter ...

Page 873: ...uorine ethylene E SOLVENTS OILS No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Name Alcohol Solvent Heat resisting grease Lubricant Lubricant Drum cleaning powder Lubricant Conducting grease Uses Cleaning e g glass plastic rubber external covers Cleaning e g metal areas removing oil or toner Lubricating e g fixing drive parts Lubricating e g friction parts Cleaning e g photosensitive drum Lubricating e g scanner rail Drum he...

Page 874: ...RUNNER 600 REV 1 JAN 2000 PRINTED IN U S A Prepared by OfficeImagingProductsTechnicalSupportDivision CANONINC PrintedinU S A REVISION 0 JAN 1999 20801 23715 30359 REVISION 1 JAN 2000 30359 5 1 Hakusan 7 chome Toride Ibaraki 302 8501 Japan ...

Search results

Summary of Contents for ImageRunner 600

Reviews:

Canon ImageRunner 600, Service Manual, Page: 35 / 875

Search results

Summary of Contents for ImageRunner 600

Reviews: